JP6974972B2 - Packaging box and manufacturing method of packaging box - Google Patents

Packaging box and manufacturing method of packaging box Download PDF

Info

Publication number
JP6974972B2
JP6974972B2 JP2017138637A JP2017138637A JP6974972B2 JP 6974972 B2 JP6974972 B2 JP 6974972B2 JP 2017138637 A JP2017138637 A JP 2017138637A JP 2017138637 A JP2017138637 A JP 2017138637A JP 6974972 B2 JP6974972 B2 JP 6974972B2
Authority
JP
Japan
Prior art keywords
main body
body portion
surface portion
sub
piece
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Active
Application number
JP2017138637A
Other languages
Japanese (ja)
Other versions
JP2019018884A (en
Inventor
学 鹿児島
桂輝 山下
久美子 萩原
Original Assignee
株式会社クラウン・パッケージ
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社クラウン・パッケージ filed Critical 株式会社クラウン・パッケージ
Priority to JP2017138637A priority Critical patent/JP6974972B2/en
Publication of JP2019018884A publication Critical patent/JP2019018884A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of JP6974972B2 publication Critical patent/JP6974972B2/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Landscapes

  • Cartons (AREA)

Description

本発明は、包装箱に関するものであり、特に、包装箱の一部を取り除くことにより被収納物を陳列することができる包装箱に関するものである。 The present invention relates to a packaging box, and more particularly to a packaging box in which an object to be stored can be displayed by removing a part of the packaging box.

従来より、包装箱の一部を取り除くことにより被収納物を陳列することができる包装箱として、特許文献1及び特許文献2の展示用収容箱が存在する。 Conventionally, as a packaging box in which an object to be stored can be displayed by removing a part of the packaging box, there are storage boxes for display of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2.

この特許文献1及び特許文献2の展示用収容箱は、有底四角筒状の収容体11と、有蓋四角筒状をなし収容体11を覆う状態で接着される蓋体12とを有し、収容体11と蓋体12とが、収容体11の正面接着部14Fと蓋体12の正面開封部16F、及び、収容体11の背面接着部14Bと蓋体12の蓋背面壁12Bで接着されていて、蓋体12の正面開封部16Fを切り取ることにより、正面接着部14Fを収容体11から切り取り、さらに、蓋体12を回転操作することにより背面接着部14Bを収容体11から切り取ることにより、蓋体12を収容体11から取り外して使用する。 The display storage boxes of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 have a bottomed square tubular housing 11 and a lid 12 having a covered square cylinder and being adhered so as to cover the housing 11. The housing 11 and the lid 12 are bonded to each other by the front bonding portion 14F of the housing 11 and the front opening portion 16F of the lid 12, and the back bonding portion 14B of the housing 11 and the lid back wall 12B of the lid 12. By cutting off the front opening portion 16F of the lid body 12, the front adhesive portion 14F is cut off from the accommodating body 11, and further, by rotating the lid body 12, the back adhesive portion 14B is cut off from the accommodating body 11. , The lid body 12 is removed from the housing body 11 and used.

また、出願人は、底面部50と、スリーブ状部5を有する内箱部で、スリーブ状部5の側面部20、30の一部が分離部24、34として他の部分と切目線を介して分離可能な内箱部A1と、内箱部を覆う外箱部で、スリーブ状部5を構成する正面部10、側面部20、30、背面部40に対応して正面部110、正面部120、130、背面部140を有するスリーブ状部105と、上面部160〜190とを有し、分離部24、34が設けられた側面部20、30に対応した側面部120、130には、切目線により形成された片部126、136が分離部24、34と接着されている外箱部A2と、を有し、外箱部A2の片部126、136を外側に回動することにより分離部24、34が片部126、136に接着した状態のまま内箱部A1から分離し、その後、外箱部A2を上方に引き上げて取り除くことにより、内箱部A1に収納された状態の商品を陳列することができる包装箱として、特許文献3に示す先行技術文献についての出願を行っている。 Further, the applicant has an inner box portion having a bottom surface portion 50 and a sleeve-shaped portion 5, and a part of the side surface portions 20 and 30 of the sleeve-shaped portion 5 is used as a separation portion 24 and 34 through a cut line with another portion. The inner box portion A1 that can be separated from the inner box, and the outer box portion that covers the inner box portion. The side surface portions 120 and 130 having the sleeve-shaped portions 105 having 120, 130 and the back surface portion 140 and the side surface portions 20 and 30 having the upper surface portions 160 to 190 and provided with the separation portions 24 and 34 have By having the outer box portion A2 in which the piece portions 126 and 136 formed by the cut line are adhered to the separation portions 24 and 34, and the piece portions 126 and 136 of the outer box portion A2 are rotated outward. The separated portions 24 and 34 are separated from the inner box portion A1 while being adhered to the single portions 126 and 136, and then the outer box portion A2 is pulled upward and removed to be stored in the inner box portion A1. As a packaging box on which products can be displayed, an application has been filed for a prior art document shown in Patent Document 3.

特開2012−30892号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-30892 特開2012−62123号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-62123 実用新案登録第3139948号公報Utility Model Registration No. 3139948 Gazette

しかし、特許文献1、2の展示用収容箱においては、収容体11と蓋体12とが正面側と背面側とで接着されているため、正面側と背面側の2箇所を破断する必要があって、陳列のための作業に手間を要する。つまり、正面接着部14Fを収容体11から切り取るとともに、背面接着部14Bを収容体11から切り取る必要があり、蓋体を取り除く作業に手間と時間を要してしまい、結果として、陳列作業に手間と時間を要してしまう。 However, in the storage boxes for exhibition of Patent Documents 1 and 2, since the housing 11 and the lid 12 are adhered to each other on the front side and the back side, it is necessary to break two places, the front side and the back side. Therefore, it takes time and effort to display. That is, it is necessary to cut off the front adhesive portion 14F from the accommodating body 11 and the back adhesive portion 14B from the accommodating body 11, which takes time and effort to remove the lid, and as a result, it takes time and effort to display. It takes time.

また、特許文献3の包装箱においても、商品の陳列作業のために外箱部A2を取り除く際に、包装箱の右側面側と左側面側の2箇所を破断する必要があり、陳列のための作業に手間を要する。つまり、片部126を回動させて分離部24を内箱部A1から分離させるとともに、片部136を回動させて分離部34を内箱部A1から分離させる必要があり、外箱部を取り除く作業に手間と時間を要してしまい、結果として、陳列作業に手間と時間を要してしまう。 Further, also in the packaging box of Patent Document 3, when the outer box portion A2 is removed for the product display work, it is necessary to break two places, the right side surface side and the left side surface side of the packaging box, for display. It takes time and effort to work. That is, it is necessary to rotate the piece 126 to separate the separation part 24 from the inner box part A1 and rotate the piece 136 to separate the separation part 34 from the inner box part A1. It takes time and effort to remove it, and as a result, it takes time and effort to display it.

そこで、本発明は、被収納物を包装するための包装箱で、包装箱の一部を取り除くことにより被収納物を陳列することができる包装箱において、包装箱の一部を取り除く作業を容易に行うことができ、よって、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行なうことができる包装箱を提供することを目的とするものである。 Therefore, the present invention is a packaging box for packaging an object to be stored, and it is easy to remove a part of the packaging box in a packaging box in which the object to be stored can be displayed by removing a part of the packaging box. It is an object of the present invention to provide a packaging box which can be easily used for displaying items to be stored.

本発明は上記問題点を解決するために創作されたものであって、第1には、包装箱であって、本体部(3、3A、3B、3C)と副体部(101、101A、101B、101C)とを有し、本体部と副体部が、ともに、シート状のブランクにより形成され、本体部が、底面部(50)と、底面部の各辺から立設する側面構成部で、本体部正面部(10)と、本体部第1側面部(20)と、本体部第2側面部(30)と、本体部背面部(40)とを有する側面構成部(5)と、を有し、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の一方の側が左側面側であり、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の他方の側が右側面側であり、本体部背面部の一部が分離部(44)として本体部背面部における分離部以外の部分である背面本体部(42)と切目線を介して分離可能に形成され、副体部が、副体部正面部(110)と、副体部背面部(140)と、上面部(150)と、フラップ(160)とを有し、副体部正面部は、上面部の正面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、フラップは、上面部の本体部第1側面部側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、上面部の背面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、本体部背面部の外側の面に沿って設けられ、分離部の外側の面に接着され、副体部正面部は、本体部正面部と非接着であり、副体部を閉状態とするには、フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、フラップが本体部第1側面部(20)の内側となるようにするとともに、副体部正面部が上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、副体部正面部が本体部正面部の内側となるようにして、本体部の上面側を上面部により閉じた状態とし、切目線を破断して分離部を背面部本体部から分離することにより、副体部が包装箱から取り除かれることを特徴とする。 The present invention has been created to solve the above problems, and first, it is a packaging box, which is a main body portion (3, 3A, 3B, 3C) and a sub-body portion (101, 101A, 101B, 101C), both the main body and the sub-body are formed of a sheet-shaped blank, and the main body is a side surface component that stands up from each side of the bottom surface (50) and the bottom surface. A side component (5) having a front surface portion (10) of the main body portion, a first side surface portion (20) of the main body portion, a second side surface portion (30) of the main body portion, and a back surface portion (40) of the main body portion. , One side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the left side surface side, and the other side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the right side surface side. A part of the back surface portion of the main body portion is formed as a separation portion (44) so as to be separable from the back surface main body portion (42) which is a portion other than the separation portion on the back surface portion of the main body portion via a cut line, and the sub-body portion is formed. It has a sub-body portion front portion (110), a sub-body portion back surface portion (140), an upper surface portion (150), and a flap (160), and the sub-body portion front portion is a side on the front side of the upper surface portion. The flaps are continuously connected from the portion via the folding line, the flaps are continuously connected from the side portion of the main body portion on the first side surface side of the upper surface portion via the folding wire, and the back portion of the sub-body portion is the side portion on the back surface side of the upper surface portion. The back surface of the sub-body is provided along the outer surface of the back surface of the main body and is adhered to the outer surface of the separation portion, and the front surface of the sub-body is the front surface of the main body. In order to close the sub-body part because it is not adhered to the part, the flap should be inside the first side surface part (20) of the main body part with the flap bent with respect to the upper surface part. With the front part of the sub-body part bent with respect to the upper surface part, the front part of the sub-body part is inside the front part of the main body part, and the upper surface side of the main body part is closed by the upper surface part. It is characterized in that the sub-body portion is removed from the packaging box by breaking and separating the separation portion from the back surface portion main body portion.

第1の構成においては、切目線を破断して1つの分離部のみを分離すればよいので、副体部(包装箱の一部)を取り除く作業を容易に行うことができ、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行なうことができる。 In the first configuration, since it is only necessary to break the cut line and separate only one separation portion, the work of removing the accessory portion (a part of the packaging box) can be easily performed, and the stored object can be stored. The display work can be easily performed.

なお、第1の構成を以下のようにしてもよい。すなわち、包装箱であって、本体部(3、3A、3B)と副体部(101、101A、101B)とを有し、本体部と副体部が、ともに、シート状のブランクにより形成され、本体部が、底面部(50)と、底面部の各辺から立設する側面構成部で、本体部正面部(10)と、本体部左側面部(20)と、本体部右側面部(30)と、本体部背面部(40)とを有する側面構成部(5)と、を有し、背面部の一部が分離部(44)として背面部における分離部以外の部分である背面部本体部(42)と切目線を介して分離可能に形成され、副体部が、副体部正面部(110)と、副体部背面部(140)と、上面部(150)と、フラップ(160)とを有し、副体部正面部は、上面部の正面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、フラップは、上面部の左側面側の辺部と右側面側の辺部のいずれかである特定辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、上面部の背面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、本体部背面部の外側の面に沿って設けられ、分離部の外側の面に接着され、副体部正面部は、本体部正面部と非接着であり、副体部を閉状態とするには、フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、フラップが本体部右側面部と本体部左側面部の2つの側面部における特定辺部に対応する側面部(20)の内側となるようにするとともに、副体部正面部が上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、副体部正面部が本体部正面部の内側となるようにして、本体部の上面側を上面部により閉じた状態とし、切目線を破断して分離部を背面部本体部から分離することにより、副体部が包装箱から取り除かれることを特徴とする包装箱としてもよい。 The first configuration may be as follows. That is, the packaging box has a main body portion (3, 3A, 3B) and a sub-body portion (101, 101A, 101B), and both the main body portion and the sub-body portion are formed of a sheet-shaped blank. The main body is a bottom surface portion (50) and a side surface component portion that stands up from each side of the bottom surface portion. ), And a side component (5) having a back surface portion (40) of the main body portion, and a part of the back surface portion as a separation portion (44) is a portion other than the separation portion in the back surface portion. It is formed separably through the portion (42) and the cut line, and the sub-body portion includes the sub-body portion front portion (110), the sub-body portion back portion (140), the upper surface portion (150), and the flap ( 160), the front part of the sub-body part is continuously provided from the side part on the front side of the upper surface part via a folding line, and the flap is the side part on the left side surface side and the side part on the right side side of the upper surface part. The back part of the sub-body part is continuously connected from the side part on the back side of the upper surface part via the fold line, and the back part of the sub-body part is the main body part. It is provided along the outer surface of the back surface and is adhered to the outer surface of the separation portion, and the front portion of the sub-body portion is not adhered to the front portion of the main body portion . With the flap bent with respect to the upper surface, the flap should be inside the side surface (20) corresponding to the specific side of the two side surfaces, the right side surface of the main body and the left side surface of the main body. With the front part of the body bent with respect to the upper surface, the front part of the sub-body part is inside the front part of the main body, and the upper surface side of the main body is closed by the upper surface part, and the cut line is drawn. The packaging box may be characterized in that the sub-body portion is removed from the packaging box by breaking and separating the separation portion from the back surface portion main body portion.

また、第2には、上記第1の構成において、分離部は、本体部背面部の下辺の一部である下辺部分(44a)と該切目線により囲まれており、分離部の下端に指を係止した状態で、分離部の下端を外側にひっぱることにより切目線が破断することを特徴とする。 Secondly, in the first configuration, the separation portion is surrounded by the lower side portion (44a) which is a part of the lower side of the back surface portion of the main body portion and the cut line, and the lower end of the separation portion is fingered. It is characterized in that the cut line is broken by pulling the lower end of the separated portion outward in the locked state.

よって、分離部の下端に指を係止した状態で、分離部の下端を外側にひっぱることにより切目線が破断することができるので、切目線の破断を容易に行なうことができる。また、切目線を破断することによる分離部の分離と副体部の取出しを一連の作業で行なうことができるので、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行うことができる。 Therefore, since the cut line can be broken by pulling the lower end of the separated portion outward with the finger locked to the lower end of the separated portion, the cut line can be easily broken. Further, since the separation portion can be separated and the sub-body portion can be taken out by breaking the cut line in a series of operations, it is possible to easily display the items to be stored.

また、第3には、上記第2の構成において、底面部には、該下辺部分における少なくとも一部を辺部とする開口部(93)が形成されていることを特徴とする。 Thirdly, in the second configuration, the bottom surface portion is characterized by having an opening (93) having at least a part of the lower side portion as a side portion.

よって、開口部が設けられているので、分離部の下端に指を係止しやすくすることができる。 Therefore, since the opening is provided, it is possible to easily lock the finger to the lower end of the separation portion.

また、第4には、上記第1から第3までのいずれかの構成において、本体部正面部には、上方に開口した切欠部(K10)が設けられ、副体部を閉状態にした際には、副体部正面部の少なくとも先端側の辺部(110c)は本体部正面部の背面側に位置することを特徴とする。 Fourth, in any of the first to third configurations, when a notch (K10) opened upward is provided on the front portion of the main body portion and the sub-body portion is closed. It is characterized in that at least the side portion (110c) on the distal end side of the front portion of the sub-body portion is located on the back surface side of the front portion of the main body portion.

よって、本体部正面部には切欠部が設けられているので、被収納物の陳列状態において、切欠部を介して本体部の正面側から被収納物を視認することができ、また、副体部を閉状態にした際には、副体部正面部の少なくとも先端側の辺部は本体部正面部の背面側に位置するので、副体部正面部の先端側の辺部との間に隙間が生じることがない。 Therefore, since the notch is provided on the front surface of the main body, the stored object can be visually recognized from the front side of the main body through the notch in the state of displaying the stored object, and the sub-body When the portion is closed, at least the side portion on the tip side of the front portion of the sub-body portion is located on the back side of the front portion of the main body portion. There are no gaps.

また、第5には、上記第1から第3までのいずれかの構成において、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部のいずれかである特定側面部には、上方に開口した切欠部を特定側面部に形成するための切目線である切欠部形成用切目線(K24)が形成され、該切欠部形成用切目線を破断することにより特定側面部の上辺と切欠部形成用切目線に沿った辺部により囲まれた切取り部(24)が特定側面部から取り除かれることを特徴とする。 Fifth, in any of the first to third configurations, there is a notch that opens upward in the specific side surface portion that is either the first side surface portion of the main body portion or the second side surface portion of the main body portion. A notch forming cut line (K24), which is a notch line for forming the portion on the specific side surface portion, is formed, and by breaking the notch forming cut line, the upper side of the specific side surface portion and the notch forming cut are formed. It is characterized in that the cut portion (24) surrounded by the side portion along the line of sight is removed from the specific side surface portion.

よって、切欠部形成用切目線を破断することにより本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部のいずれかに上方に開口した切欠部が設けられるので、この切欠部を介して、陳列状態の被収納物を視認することができる。 Therefore, by breaking the cut line for forming the notch portion, a notch portion opened upward is provided in either the first side surface portion of the main body portion or the second side surface portion of the main body portion. You can visually check the items to be stored.

なお、上記第5の構成において、切欠部形成用切目線の両側の端部が特定側面部の上辺に接するとしてもよい。 In the fifth configuration, the ends on both sides of the notch forming cut line may be in contact with the upper side of the specific side surface portion.

また、第6には、上記第1から第5までのいずれかの構成において、副体部を閉状態にした際には、副体部正面部の先端側の辺部が、底面部の上面に接することを特徴とする。 Sixth, in any of the first to fifth configurations, when the sub-body portion is closed, the side portion on the tip end side of the front portion of the sub-body portion is the upper surface of the bottom surface portion. It is characterized by being in contact with.

よって、副体部の閉状態における包装箱の強度を高く維持することができる。 Therefore, the strength of the packaging box in the closed state of the accessory portion can be maintained high.

また、第7には、包装箱であって、本体部(203)と副体部(301、301A)とを有し、本体部と副体部が、ともに、シート状のブランクにより形成され、本体部が、底面部(250)と、底面部の各辺から立設する側面構成部で、本体部正面部(210)と、本体部第1側面部(220)と、本体部第2側面部(230)と、本体部背面部(240)とを有する側面構成部(205)と、を有し、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の一方の側が左側面側であり、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の他方の側が右側面側であり、本体部背面部の一部が分離部(244)として本体部背面部における分離部以外の部分である背面本体部(242)と切目線を介して分離可能に形成され、副体部が、副体部正面部(310)と、副体部背面部(340)と、上面部(350)と、フラップ(360)とを有し、副体部正面部は、上面部の正面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、フラップは、上面部の本体部第1側面部側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、上面部の背面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、本体部背面部の外側の面に沿って設けられ、分離部の外側の面に接着され、副体部正面部は、本体部正面部と非接着であり、副体部正面部には、差込み片(322)が設けられるとともに、本体部正面部には、差込み片を差し込むための被差込み部(212)が設けられ、副体部を閉状態とするには、フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、フラップが本体部第1側面部(20)の内側となるようにするとともに、差込み片を被差込み部に差し込むことにより、本体部の上面側を上面部により閉じた状態とし、差込み片を被差込み部から抜くとともに切目線を破断して分離部を背面部本体部から分離することにより、副体部が包装箱から取り除かれることを特徴とする。 Seventh, the packaging box has a main body portion (203) and a sub-body portion (301, 301A), and both the main body portion and the sub-body portion are formed of a sheet-shaped blank. The main body is a bottom surface portion (250) and a side surface component portion that stands up from each side of the bottom surface portion. The main body portion front portion (210), the main body portion first side surface portion (220), and the main body portion second side surface It has a side component portion (205) having a portion (230) and a back surface portion (240) of the main body portion, and one side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the left side surface side. The other side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the right side surface side, and a part of the back surface portion of the main body portion is a separation portion (244) other than the separation portion on the back surface portion of the main body portion. It is formed separably from the back main body portion (242) via the cut line, and the sub-body portion includes the sub-body portion front portion (310), the sub-body portion back portion (340), and the upper surface portion (350). It has a flap (360), and the front portion of the sub-body portion is continuously provided from the front side portion of the upper surface portion via a folding line, and the flap is connected from the side portion of the upper surface portion on the first side surface portion of the main body portion. The back part of the sub-body part is connected via the fold line from the side part on the back side of the upper surface part, and the back part of the sub-body part is connected along the outer surface of the back part of the main body part. Provided and adhered to the outer surface of the separation portion, the front portion of the sub-body portion is not adhered to the front portion of the main body portion, and the front portion of the sub-body portion is provided with an insertion piece (322) and the main body portion. An insertion portion (212) for inserting an insertion piece is provided on the front portion, and in order to close the sub-body portion, the flap is bent with respect to the upper surface portion, and the flap is the first main body portion. By making it inside the side surface portion (20) and inserting the insertion piece into the insertion portion, the upper surface side of the main body portion is closed by the upper surface portion, and the insertion piece is pulled out from the insertion portion and the cut line is formed. It is characterized in that the sub-body portion is removed from the packaging box by breaking and separating the separation portion from the back surface portion main body portion.

第7の構成においては、切目線を破断して1つの分離部のみを分離すればよいので、副体部(包装箱の一部)を取り除く作業を容易に行うことができ、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行なうことができる。 In the seventh configuration, since it is only necessary to break the cut line and separate only one separation portion, the work of removing the accessory portion (a part of the packaging box) can be easily performed, and the stored object can be stored. The display work can be easily performed.

なお、第7の構成を以下のようにしてもよい。すなわち、包装箱であって、本体部(203)と副体部(301、301A)とを有し、本体部と副体部が、ともに、シート状のブランクにより形成され、本体部が、底面部(250)と、底面部の各辺から立設する側面構成部で、本体部正面部(210)と、本体部左側面部(220)と、本体部右側面部(230)と、本体部背面部(240)とを有する側面構成部(205)と、を有し、背面部の一部が分離部(244)として背面部における分離部以外の部分である背面部本体部(242)と切目線を介して分離可能に形成され、副体部が、副体部正面部(310)と、副体部背面部(340)と、上面部(350)と、フラップ(360)とを有し、副体部正面部は、上面部の正面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、フラップは、上面部の左側面側の辺部と右側面側の辺部のいずれかである特定辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、上面部の背面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、本体部背面部の外側の面に沿って設けられ、分離部の外側の面に接着され、副体部正面部は、本体部正面部と非接着であり、副体部正面部には、差込み片(322)が設けられるとともに、本体部正面部には、差込み片を差し込むための被差込み部(212)が設けられ、副体部を閉状態とするには、フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、フラップが本体部右側面部と本体部左側面部の2つの側面部における特定辺部に対応する側面部(20)の内側となるようにするとともに、差込み片を被差込み部に差し込むことにより、本体部の上面側を上面部により閉じた状態とし、差込み片を被差込み部から抜くとともに切目線を破断して分離部を背面部本体部から分離することにより、副体部が包装箱から取り除かれることを特徴とする包装箱としてもよい。 The seventh configuration may be as follows. That is, it is a packaging box and has a main body portion (203) and a sub-body portion (301, 301A). Both the main body portion and the sub-body portion are formed of a sheet-shaped blank, and the main body portion has a bottom surface. A side component that stands up from each side of the bottom (250), the front of the main body (210), the left side of the main body (220), the right side of the main body (230), and the back of the main body. It has a side surface component (205) having a portion (240), and a part of the back surface portion is cut off from the back surface portion main body portion (242) which is a portion other than the separation portion in the back surface portion as a separation portion (244). It is formed separably through the line of sight, and the sub-body portion has a sub-body portion front portion (310), a sub-body portion back surface portion (340), an upper surface portion (350), and a flap (360). , The front part of the sub-body part is continuously connected from the side part on the front side of the upper surface part via a broken line, and the flap is specified as either the side part on the left side surface side or the side part on the right side side of the upper surface part. The back part of the sub-body part is continuously connected from the side part via the fold line, and the back part of the sub-body part is continuously connected from the side part on the back side of the upper surface part via the fold line. The front part of the sub-body part is not adhered to the front part of the main body part, and the front part of the sub-body part is provided with an insertion piece (322). An insertion portion (212) for inserting an insertion piece is provided on the front portion of the main body portion, and in order to close the sub-body portion, the flap is bent with respect to the upper surface portion and the flap is the main body. The upper surface side of the main body portion is formed by inserting the insertion piece into the insertion portion while making it inside the side surface portion (20) corresponding to the specific side portion in the two side surface portions of the right side surface portion and the left side surface portion of the main body portion. Is closed by the upper surface part, and the sub-body part is removed from the packaging box by pulling out the insertion piece from the insertion part and breaking the cut line to separate the separation part from the back part main body part. It may be used as a packaging box.

また、第8には、上記第7の構成において、分離部は、本体部背面部の上辺の一部である上辺部分(240c)と該切目線により囲まれており、分離部を背面部本体部から分離した際には、本体部背面部には、上方に開口した切欠部が形成されることを特徴とする。 Eighth, in the seventh configuration, the separation portion is surrounded by the upper side portion (240c) which is a part of the upper side of the back surface portion of the main body portion and the cut line, and the separation portion is the back surface portion main body. When separated from the portion, a notch portion opened upward is formed on the back surface portion of the main body portion.

よって、分離部を背面部本体部から分離した際には、本体部背面部には、上方に開口した切欠部が形成されるので、被収納物の陳列状態において、本体部背面部側を陳列における正面側とすることにより、切欠部を介して被収納物を視認することができる。 Therefore, when the separated portion is separated from the back surface portion, a notch portion opened upward is formed on the back surface portion of the main body portion, so that the back surface portion side of the main body portion is displayed in the state of displaying the stored items. By setting it to the front side of the above, the stored object can be visually recognized through the notch.

また、第9には、上記第1から第8までのいずれかの構成において、上面部の本体部第1側面部側には、(本体部第1側面部側に突出した)突状部(153A、154、156、354、356)が設けられ、フラップは、本体部第1側面部側の辺部における突状部が形成された部分以外の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、突状部の先端が、左右方向において、本体部第1側面部の内側の面よりも外側に突出するとともに、上面部の本体部第2側面部側の辺部に沿った端部領域(158、358)における本部第2側面部側の先端が、左右方向において、本体部第2側面部の内側の面よりも外側に突出し、副体部を閉状態にした際には、突状部が、本体部第1側面部の上辺の上側にあり(「接し」としてもよい)、上面部の本体部第2側面部側の辺部に沿った端部領域が、本体部第2側面部の上辺の上側にある(「接する」としてもよい)ことを特徴とする。よって、副体部の閉状態における包装箱の強度を高く維持することができる。 In addition, in any of the first to eighth configurations, the ninth is a protruding portion (protruding toward the first side surface portion of the main body portion) on the first side surface portion side of the main body portion of the upper surface portion. 153A, 154, 156, 354, 356) are provided, and the flaps are continuously provided from the side portions other than the portion where the protruding portion is formed on the side portion on the first side surface portion side of the main body portion via a broken line, and the flaps are continuously provided. The tip of the shaped portion protrudes outward from the inner surface of the first side surface portion of the main body portion in the left-right direction, and the end region along the side portion of the upper surface portion on the second side surface portion of the main body portion (158, When the tip of the second side surface portion of the main body in 358) protrudes outward from the inner surface of the second side surface portion of the main body portion in the left-right direction and the sub-body portion is closed, the protruding portion is formed. The end area along the side of the second side surface of the main body, which is above the upper side of the first side surface of the main body (may be "contacted"), is the upper side of the second side surface of the main body. It is characterized by being on the upper side of (may be "contacted"). Therefore, the strength of the packaging box in the closed state of the accessory portion can be maintained high.

また、第10には、上記第1から第8までのいずれかの構成において、本体部第2側面部の正面側の辺部から折れ線を介して糊代部(49、249)が連設され、該糊代部が本体部正面部の本体部第2側面部側の端部領域に接着され、本体部正面部と本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部と本体部背面部とにおける互いに隣接する各部は、糊代部を介して連設された本体部正面部と本体部第2側面部を除き、折れ線を介して連設されており、フラップは、上面部における本体部第1側面部側の辺部のみから折れ線を介して連設されていることを特徴とする。 Further, in the tenth aspect, in any of the first to eighth configurations, a glue margin portion (49, 249) is continuously provided from the front side portion of the second side surface portion of the main body portion via a polygonal line. The glue margin portion is adhered to the end region of the front surface portion of the main body portion on the second side surface portion side of the main body portion, and the front surface portion of the main body portion, the first side surface portion of the main body portion, the second side surface portion of the main body portion, and the back surface portion of the main body portion are formed. Each part adjacent to each other is connected via a polygonal line except for the front surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion which are continuously connected via the glue margin portion, and the flap is the main body portion on the upper surface portion. 1 It is characterized in that it is continuously connected from only the side portion on the side surface portion side via a polygonal line.

よって、フラップは、上面部における本体部第1側面部側の辺部のみから折れ線を介して連設されているので、側面構成部を糊代部を本体部第2側面部に対して折曲しない状態で折り畳んだ際に、フラップが本体部の左右方向の幅から突出することがない。 Therefore, since the flaps are continuously provided from only the side portion of the upper surface portion on the first side surface portion side of the main body portion via the folding line, the side component portion is bent with respect to the second side surface portion of the main body portion. When folded without the flap, the flap does not protrude from the width of the main body in the left-right direction.

また、第11には、上記第1から第10までのいずれかの構成において、上面部の本体部第2側面部側の辺部から折れ線を介して第2フラップ(170、370)が連設され、副体部を閉状態にするには、第2フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、第2フラップが、本体部第2側面部の内側となるようにすることを特徴とする。 Further, in the eleventh configuration, in any of the first to tenth configurations, a second flap (170, 370) is continuously provided from the side portion of the upper surface portion on the second side surface portion side of the main body portion via a polygonal line. In order to close the sub-body portion, the second flap is bent with respect to the upper surface portion so that the second flap is inside the second side surface portion of the main body portion. ..

また、第12には、上記第11の構成において、上面部の本体部第1側面部側には、突状部(153A、154、156、354、356)が設けられ、フラップは、本体部第1側面部側の辺部における突状部が形成された部分以外の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、突状部の先端が、左右方向において、本体部第1側面部の内側の面よりも外側に突出し、上面部の本体部第2側面部側には、第2突状部(153B、155、157、355、357)が設けられ、第2フラップは、本体部第2側面部側の辺部における第2突状部が形成された部分以外の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、第2突状部の先端が、左右方向において、本体部第2側面部の内側の面よりも外側に突出し、副体部を閉状態にした際には、突状部が、本体部第1側面部の上辺の上側にあり、第2突状部が、本体部第2側面部の上辺の上側にあることを特徴とする。よって、副体部の閉状態における包装箱の強度を高く維持することができる。 Further, in the twelfth configuration, in the eleventh configuration, a protruding portion (153A, 154, 156, 354, 356) is provided on the first side surface side of the main body portion of the upper surface portion, and the flap is the main body portion. It is continuously provided from the side portion other than the portion where the protruding portion is formed on the side portion on the first side surface portion via a polygonal line, and the tip of the protruding portion is inside the first side surface portion of the main body portion in the left-right direction. A second protruding portion (153B, 155, 157, 355, 357) is provided on the second side surface side of the main body portion of the upper surface portion, which protrudes outward from the surface, and the second flap is the second side surface of the main body portion. It is continuously provided from the side portion other than the portion where the second protruding portion is formed on the side portion on the portion side via a polygonal line, and the tip of the second protruding portion is inside the second side surface portion of the main body portion in the left-right direction. When the sub-body portion is closed by projecting outward from the surface of the main body portion, the protruding portion is on the upper side of the upper side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion, and the second protruding portion is on the second side surface of the main body portion. It is characterized by being on the upper side of the upper side of the portion. Therefore, the strength of the packaging box in the closed state of the accessory portion can be maintained high.

また、第13には、上記第1から第12までのいずれかの構成において、側面部構成部が、本体部正面部、本体部第1側面部、本体部背面部、本体部第2側面部の順に連設され、底面部が、ワンタッチ底により形成され、本体部正面部の下辺から連設された底面部第1片部(60)と、本体部第1側面部の下辺から連設された底面部第2片部(70)と、本体部第2側面部の下辺から連設された底面部第3片部(80)と、本体部背面部の下辺から連設された底面部第4片部(90)とを有し、底面部第1片部と底面部第2片部からなる底面部第1片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である第1端部領域(74)が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該第1端部領域が底面部第1片部対における他方に接着され、底面部第3片部と底面部第4片部からなる底面部第2片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である第2端部領域(84)が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該第2端部領域が底面部第2片部対における他方に接着されていることを特徴とする。 Further, in the thirteenth, in any of the first to twelfth configurations, the side surface portion is the front surface portion of the main body portion, the first side surface portion of the main body portion, the back surface portion of the main body portion, and the second side surface portion of the main body portion. The bottom surface is formed by a one-touch bottom, and the bottom surface is connected from the lower side of the front surface of the main body to the first piece (60) of the bottom surface and the lower surface of the first side surface of the main body. The bottom surface portion 2nd piece (70), the bottom surface portion 3rd piece portion (80) connected from the lower side of the main body portion 2nd side surface portion, and the bottom surface portion connected from the lower side of the main body portion back surface portion. The first end region (74) which has four pieces (90) and is the other side portion of one of the bottom portion first piece pair consisting of the bottom portion first piece portion and the bottom portion second piece portion. ) Is bendable via a fold line, the first end region is adhered to the other side of the bottom surface first piece pair, and the bottom surface portion consisting of the bottom surface portion third piece portion and the bottom surface portion fourth piece portion. The second end region (84), which is the other side portion of one of the two piece pairs, is bendable via a fold line, and the second end region is on the other side of the bottom surface portion second piece pair. It is characterized by being adhered.

また、第14には、包装箱であって、本体部(3C)と副体部(101C)とを有し、本体部と副体部が、ともに、シート状のブランクにより形成され、本体部が、底面部(50)と、底面部の各辺から立設する側面構成部で、本体部正面部(10)と、本体部第1側面部(20)と、本体部第2側面部(30)と、本体部背面部(40)と、糊代部(49)とを有し、本体部第2側面部、本体部正面部、本体部第1側面部、本体部背面部、糊代部の順に連設された側面構成部(5)と、を有し、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の一方の側が側面構成部の左側面側となり、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の他方の側が側面構成部の右側面側となり、糊代部が、本体部第2側面部の本体部背面部側の端部領域に接着され、本体部正面部には、上方に開口した切欠部(K10)が設けられ、本体部背面部の一部が分離部(44)として本体部背面部における分離部以外の部分である背面本体部(42)と切目線を介して分離可能に形成され、分離部は、本体部背面部の下辺の一部である下辺部分(44a)と該切目線により囲まれており、底面部には、該下辺部分における少なくとも一部を辺部とする開口部(93)が形成され、副体部が、副体部正面部(110)と、副体部背面部(140)と、上面部(150)と、フラップ(170)とを有し、副体部正面部は、上面部の正面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、フラップは、上面部の本体部第2側面部側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、上面部の背面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、本体部背面部の外側の面に沿って設けられ、分離部の外側の面に接着され、上面部の本体部第2側面部側には、突状部(153B、155、157)が設けられ、フラップは、上面部の本体部第2側面部側の辺部における突状部が形成された部分以外の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、突状部の先端が、左右方向において、本体部第2側面部の内側の面よりも外側に突出し、副体部正面部は、本体部正面部と非接着であり、副体部を閉状態とするには、フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、フラップが本体部第2側面部(30)の内側となるようにするとともに、副体部正面部が上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、副体部正面部が本体部正面部の内側となるようにして、本体部の上面側を上面部により閉じた状態とし、副体部を閉状態にした際には、副体部正面部の少なくとも先端側の辺部(110c)は、本体部正面部の背面側に位置し、突状部が、本体部第2側面部の上辺の上側にあり、分離部の下端に指を係止した状態で、分離部の下端を外側にひっぱり切目線を破断して分離部を背面部本体部から分離することにより、副体部が包装箱から取り除かれることを特徴とする。 The fourteenth is a packaging box, which has a main body portion (3C) and a sub-body portion (101C), both of which are formed of a sheet-shaped blank and have a main body portion. However, the bottom surface portion (50) and the side surface component portion erected from each side of the bottom surface portion, the main body portion front portion (10), the main body portion first side surface portion (20), and the main body portion second side surface portion ( 30), a back surface portion (40) of the main body portion, and a glue margin portion (49), and the second side surface portion of the main body portion, the front surface portion of the main body portion, the first side surface portion of the main body portion, the back surface portion of the main body portion, and the glue margin portion. It has a side surface constituent part (5) connected in the order of the portions, and one side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the left side surface side of the side surface constituent portion, and the first side surface of the main body portion. The other side of the portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the right side surface side of the side surface component portion, and the glue margin portion is adhered to the end region on the back surface portion side of the main body portion of the second side surface portion of the main body portion. Is provided with a notch (K10) opened upward, and a part of the back surface portion of the main body portion is cut off from the back surface main body portion (42) which is a portion other than the separation portion on the back surface portion of the main body portion as a separation portion (44). It is formed separably through the line of sight, and the separated portion is surrounded by a lower side portion (44a) which is a part of the lower side of the back surface portion of the main body and the cut line, and the bottom surface portion is at least in the lower side portion. An opening (93) having a part as a side portion is formed, and the sub-body portion includes a sub-body portion front portion (110), a sub-body portion back surface portion (140), an upper surface portion (150), and a flap ( 170), the front part of the sub-body part is continuously provided from the side part on the front side of the upper surface part via the folding line, and the flap has the folding line from the side part on the second side surface part of the main body part of the upper surface part. The back surface portion of the sub-body portion is continuously provided via a broken line from the side portion on the back surface side of the upper surface portion, and the back surface portion of the sub-body portion is provided along the outer surface of the back surface portion of the main body portion. , Adhered to the outer surface of the separation portion, a protruding portion (153B, 155, 157) is provided on the second side surface portion side of the main body portion of the upper surface portion, and the flap is the second side surface portion of the main body portion of the upper surface portion. It is continuously connected from the side portion other than the portion where the protruding portion is formed on the side portion via a broken line, and the tip of the protruding portion is outside the inner surface of the second side surface portion of the main body in the left-right direction. The front part of the sub-body part is not adhered to the front part of the main body part. In addition to being inside the portion (30), the front portion of the sub-body portion is bent with respect to the upper surface portion, and the front portion of the sub-body portion is inside the front portion of the main body portion. The state where the upper surface side is closed by the upper surface part When the sub-body portion is closed, at least the tip side side portion (110c) of the sub-body portion front portion is located on the back side of the main body portion front portion, and the protruding portion is the main body portion first. 2 It is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface part, and with the finger locked to the lower end of the separation part, the lower end of the separation part is pulled outward to break the cut line and separate the separation part from the back part main body part. It is characterized in that the accessory part is removed from the packaging box.

第14の構成においては、切目線を破断して1つの分離部のみを分離すればよいので、副体部(包装箱の一部)を取り除く作業を容易に行うことができ、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行なうことができる。 In the fourteenth configuration, since it is only necessary to break the cut line and separate only one separation portion, the work of removing the accessory portion (a part of the packaging box) can be easily performed, and the stored object can be stored. The display work can be easily performed.

また、分離部の下端に指を係止した状態で、分離部の下端を外側にひっぱることにより切目線が破断することができるので、切目線の破断を容易に行なうことができる。また、切目線を破断することによる分離部の分離と副体部の取出しを一連の作業で行なうことができるので、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行うことができる。また、開口部が設けられているので、分離部の下端に指を係止しやすくすることができる。 Further, since the cut line can be broken by pulling the lower end of the separated portion outward with the finger locked to the lower end of the separated portion, the cut line can be easily broken. Further, since the separation portion can be separated and the sub-body portion can be taken out by breaking the cut line in a series of operations, it is possible to easily display the items to be stored. Further, since the opening is provided, it is possible to easily lock the finger to the lower end of the separation portion.

また、本体部正面部には切欠部が設けられているので、被収納物の陳列状態において、切欠部を介して本体部の正面側から被収納物を視認することができる。 Further, since the cutout portion is provided on the front portion of the main body portion, the stored object can be visually recognized from the front side of the main body portion via the cutout portion in the state of displaying the stored object.

また、副体部を閉状態にした際には、副体部正面部の少なくとも先端側の辺部は本体部正面部の背面側に位置するので、副体部正面部の先端側の辺部との間に隙間が生じることがなく、また、突状部が、本体部第2側面部の上辺の上側にあるので、副体部の閉状態における包装箱の強度を高く維持することができる。 Further, when the sub-body portion is closed, at least the side portion on the tip side of the front portion of the sub-body portion is located on the back side of the front portion of the main body portion, so that the side portion on the tip end side of the front portion of the sub-body portion Since there is no gap between the two and the protruding portion on the upper side of the upper side of the second side surface portion of the main body portion, the strength of the packaging box in the closed state of the sub-body portion can be maintained high. ..

また、第15には、上記第14の構成において、上面部の本体部第1側面部側の辺部から折れ線を介して第2フラップ(160)が連設され、上面部の本体部第1側面部側には、第2突状部(153A、154、156)が設けられ、第2フラップは、本体部第1側面部側の辺部における第2突状部が形成された部分以外の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、第2突状部の先端が、左右方向において、本体部第1側面部の内側の面よりも外側に突出し、副体部を閉状態にするには、第2フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、第2フラップが、本体部第1側面部の内側となるようにし、副体部を閉状態にした際には、第2突状部が、本体部第1側面部の上辺の上側にあることを特徴とする。よって、副体部の閉状態における包装箱の強度を高く維持することができる。 Further, in the fifteenth configuration, a second flap (160) is continuously provided from the side portion of the upper surface portion on the first side surface portion side of the main body portion via a broken line, and the main body portion first of the upper surface portion is provided. A second protruding portion (153A, 154, 156) is provided on the side surface portion side, and the second flap is a portion other than the portion where the second protruding portion is formed on the side portion on the first side surface portion side of the main body portion. It is connected continuously from the side part via a polygonal line, and the tip of the second protruding part protrudes outward from the inner surface of the first side surface part of the main body part in the left-right direction, and the subbody part is closed. When the second flap is bent with respect to the upper surface portion and the second flap is inside the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the sub-body portion is closed, the second protruding portion is formed. However, it is characterized in that it is located on the upper side of the upper side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion. Therefore, the strength of the packaging box in the closed state of the accessory portion can be maintained high.

また、第16には、上記第14又は第15の構成において、底面部が、ワンタッチ底により形成され、本体部第2側面部の下辺から連設された底面部第1片部(60)と、本体部正面部の下辺から連設された底面部第2片部(70)と、本体部背面部の下辺から連設された底面部第3片部(80)と、本体部第1側面部の下辺から連設された底面部第4片部(90)とを有し、底面部第1片部と底面部第2片部からなる底面部第1片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である第1端部領域(74)が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該第1端部領域が底面部第1片部対における他方に接着され、底面部第3片部と底面部第4片部からなる底面部第2片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である第2端部領域(84)が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該第2端部領域が底面部第2片部対における他方に接着されていることを特徴とする。 Further, the sixteenth, in the configuration of the fourteenth or fifteenth, the bottom surface portion, is formed by one-touch bottom, the first arm portion bottom portion which is continuously provided from the lower side of the second side body portion (60) , The second piece (70) of the bottom surface connected from the lower side of the front surface of the main body, the third piece (80) of the bottom surface connected from the lower side of the back surface of the main body, and the first side surface of the main body. The other side of the pair of the first piece of the bottom surface portion having the fourth piece portion (90) of the bottom surface portion continuously provided from the lower side of the portion and consisting of the first piece portion of the bottom surface portion and the second piece portion of the bottom surface portion. The first end region (74), which is a portion of the base portion, can be bent through a folding line, and the first end region is adhered to the other side of the bottom portion first piece pair, and the bottom portion third piece portion and the bottom portion. The second end region (84), which is a portion on the other side of one of the pair of the second bottom portion consisting of the fourth piece of the bottom portion, can be bent via a folding line, and the second end region can be bent. Is adhered to the other side of the second piece pair of the bottom surface portion.

よって、本体部第2側面部又は本体部背面部に糊代部を設けることにより、本体部背面部と副体部背面部を接着した後に、本体部第2側面部を本体部正面部側に折り返すとともに、本体部背面部を本体部第1側面部側に折り返して製造することにより、切欠部が設けられた本体部正面部を折り返すことがないので、本体部正面部を折り返す場合に比べて、折り返しの操作が容易となり、結果として、包装箱の製造が容易となる。 Therefore, by providing a glue margin portion on the second side surface portion of the main body portion or the back surface portion of the main body portion, after adhering the back surface portion of the main body portion and the back surface portion of the sub-body portion, the second side surface portion of the main body portion is placed on the front surface portion of the main body portion. By folding back and folding the back surface of the main body toward the first side surface of the main body, the front surface of the main body provided with the notch is not folded back, so compared to the case where the front surface of the main body is folded back. , The folding operation becomes easy, and as a result, the packaging box becomes easy to manufacture.

また、第17には、包装箱であって、本体部(3C)と副体部(101C)とを有し、本体部と副体部が、ともに、シート状のブランクにより形成され、本体部が、底面部(50)と、底面部の各辺から立設する側面構成部で、本体部正面部(10)と、本体部第1側面部(20)と、本体部第2側面部(30)と、本体部背面部(40)と、糊代部(49)とを有し、本体部第2側面部、本体部正面部、本体部第1側面部、本体部背面部、糊代部の順に連設された側面構成部(5)と、を有し、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の一方の側が側面構成部の左側面側となり、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の他方の側が側面構成部の右側面側となり、糊代部が、本体部第2側面部の背面側の端部領域に接着され、本体部正面部には、上方に開口した切欠部(K10)が設けられ、本体部背面部の一部が分離部(44)として本体部背面部における分離部以外の部分である背面本体部(42)と切目線を介して分離可能に形成され、底面部が、ワンタッチ底により形成され、本体部第2側面部の下辺から連設された底面部第1片部(60)と、本体部正面部の下辺から連設された底面部第2片部(70)と、本体部背面部の下辺から連設された底面部第3片部(80)と、本体部第1側面部の下辺から連設された底面部第4片部(90)とを有し、底面部第1片部と底面部第2片部からなる底面部第1片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である第1端部領域(74)が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該第1端部領域が底面部第1片部対における他方に接着され、底面部第3片部と底面部第4片部からなる底面部第2片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である第2端部領域(84)が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該第2端部領域が底面部第2片部対における他方に接着され、副体部が、副体部正面部(110)と、副体部背面部(140)と、上面部(150)と、フラップ(170)とを有し、副体部正面部は、上面部の正面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、フラップは、上面部の本体部第2側面部側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、上面部の背面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、本体部背面部の外側の面に沿って設けられ、分離部の外側の面に接着され、副体部を閉状態とするには、フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、フラップが本体部第2側面部(30)の内側となるようにするとともに、副体部正面部が上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、副体部正面部が本体部正面部の内側となるようにして、本体部の上面側を上面部により閉じた状態とし、切目線を破断して分離部を背面部本体部から分離することにより、副体部が包装箱から取り除かれる包装箱の製造方法であって、展開状態の副体部に展開状態の本体部を接着する第1接着工程であって、副体部背面部と本体部背面部を重ねた状態で、分離部と副体部背面部を接着させるとともに、本体部正面部と副体部正面部を非接着とする第1接着工程と、底面部第1片部と底面部第2片部を側面構成部に対して折り返し第1端部領域を外側に折り返すとともに、第1端部領域と、底面部第1片部と底面部第2片部の他方における第1端部領域が接着する領域のいずれかに接着剤を塗布した状態で、本体部第2側面部を本体部正面部に対して折り返すことにより、第1端部領域と、底面部第1片部と底面部第2片部の他方とを接着する第2接着工程と、底面部第3片部と底面部第4片部を側面構成部に対して折り返し第2端部領域を外側に折り返すとともに、第2端部領域と、底面部第3片部と底面部第4片部の他方における第2端部領域が接着する領域のいずれかと、糊代部と本体部第2側面部における糊代部が接着する領域のいずれとに接着剤を塗布した状態で、本体部背面部を本体部第1側面部に対して折り返すことにより、第2端部領域と、底面部第3片部と底面部第4片部の他方とを接着するとともに、糊代部と本体部第2側面部を接着する第3接着工程と、を有することを特徴とする。
The 17th is a packaging box, which has a main body portion (3C) and a sub-body portion (101C), both of which are formed of a sheet-shaped blank, and the main body portion is formed. However, the bottom surface portion (50) and the side surface component portion erected from each side of the bottom surface portion include the main body portion front portion (10), the main body portion first side surface portion (20), and the main body portion second side surface portion ( 30), the back surface of the main body (40), and the glue margin (49), the second side surface of the main body, the front surface of the main body, the first side surface of the main body, the back surface of the main body, and the glue margin. It has a side surface component (5) connected in the order of the parts, and one side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the left side surface side of the side surface component portion, and the first side surface of the main body portion. The other side of the portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the right side surface side of the side surface component portion, and the glue margin portion is adhered to the end region on the back surface side of the second side surface portion of the main body portion. A notch (K10) opened upward is provided, and a part of the back surface portion of the main body portion serves as a separation portion (44) via a cut line with the back surface main body portion (42) which is a portion other than the separation portion in the back surface portion of the main body portion. The bottom surface is formed by a one-touch bottom, and is connected from the lower side of the front surface of the main body to the first piece (60) of the bottom surface, which is connected from the lower side of the second side surface of the main body. The second piece (70) of the bottom surface portion, the third piece portion (80) of the bottom surface portion connected from the lower side of the back surface portion of the main body portion, and the bottom surface portion connected from the lower side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion. A first end region (a first end region) which has a fourth piece (90) and is a portion on one side of a pair of the first piece of the bottom portion consisting of the first piece of the bottom portion and the second piece of the bottom portion. 74) is bendable via a fold line, the first end region is adhered to the other side of the first piece pair of the bottom surface portion, and the bottom surface portion composed of the third piece portion of the bottom surface portion and the fourth piece portion of the bottom surface portion. The second end region (84), which is the other side portion of one of the second piece pairs, is bendable via a fold line, and the second end region is the other side of the bottom surface portion second piece pair. The sub-body portion has a sub-body portion front portion (110), a sub-body portion back surface portion (140), an upper surface portion (150), and a flap (170). Is continuously connected from the front side side of the upper surface portion via a fold line, and the flaps are continuously provided from the side portion of the upper surface portion on the second side surface portion side of the main body portion via the fold line, and the back portion of the sub-body portion is connected. , It is connected from the back side side of the upper surface portion via a folding line, and the back surface portion of the sub-body portion is provided along the outer surface of the back surface portion of the main body portion, and is adhered to the outer surface of the separation portion to be attached to the sub body portion. To close the body, the flap should be folded with respect to the top surface. It should be inside the second side surface portion (30) of the body portion, and the front portion of the sub-body portion should be inside the front portion of the main body portion while the front portion of the sub-body portion is bent with respect to the upper surface portion. This is a method for manufacturing a packaging box in which the sub-body portion is removed from the packaging box by closing the upper surface side of the main body portion by the upper surface portion and breaking the cut line to separate the separation portion from the back surface portion main body portion. This is the first bonding step of adhering the unfolded main body to the unfolded sub-body, with the back of the sub-body and the back of the main body overlapping, and the separated part and the back of the sub-body. The first bonding step of adhering the front part of the main body and the front part of the sub-body part to make them non-adhesive, and the first end of the bottom surface portion first piece and the bottom surface portion second piece folded back with respect to the side surface constituent part. A state in which the portion area is folded outward and the adhesive is applied to either the first end region or the region where the first end region on the other side of the bottom surface first piece and the bottom surface second piece adheres. Then, by folding back the second side surface portion of the main body portion with respect to the front surface portion of the main body portion, a second bonding step of adhering the first end portion region, the first piece portion of the bottom surface portion, and the other of the second piece portion of the bottom surface portion. The third piece of the bottom surface and the fourth piece of the bottom surface are folded back with respect to the side surface constituent portion, and the second end region is folded outward, and the second end region, the third piece of the bottom surface, and the bottom surface portion are folded back. With the adhesive applied to either the region where the second end region on the other side of the fourth piece adheres or the region where the glue margin portion and the glue margin portion on the second side surface portion of the main body adhere. By folding back the back surface portion of the main body portion with respect to the first side surface portion of the main body portion, the second end portion region and the other of the third piece portion of the bottom surface portion and the fourth piece portion of the bottom surface portion are adhered to each other, and the glue margin portion is formed. It is characterized by having a third bonding step of bonding the second side surface portion of the main body portion.

第17の構成においては、第1接着工程〜第3接着工程により包装箱を製造できるので、容易に包装箱を製造することができる。 In the seventeenth configuration, since the packaging box can be manufactured by the first bonding step to the third bonding step, the packaging box can be easily manufactured.

また、製造された包装箱においては、切目線を破断して1つの分離部のみを分離すればよいので、副体部(包装箱の一部)を取り除く作業を容易に行うことができ、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行なうことができる。 Further, in the manufactured packaging box, since it is only necessary to break the cut line and separate only one separation portion, the work of removing the accessory portion (a part of the packaging box) can be easily performed, and the cover can be covered. The display work of the stored items can be easily performed.

また、第2接着工程や第3接着工程において、本体部第2側面部や本体部背面部を折り返すので、切欠部が設けられた本体部正面部を折り返す必要がなく、本体部正面部を折り返す場合に比べて、折り返しの操作が容易となり、結果として、包装箱の製造が容易となる。 Further, in the second bonding step and the third bonding step, since the second side surface portion of the main body portion and the back surface portion of the main body portion are folded back, it is not necessary to fold back the front portion of the main body portion provided with the cutout portion, and the front portion of the main body portion is folded back. Compared to the case, the folding operation becomes easier, and as a result, the packaging box becomes easier to manufacture.

また、製造された包装箱においては、切目線を破断して1つの分離部のみを分離すればよいので、副体部(包装箱の一部)を取り除く作業を容易に行うことができ、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行なうことができる。 Further, in the manufactured packaging box, since it is only necessary to break the cut line and separate only one separation portion, the work of removing the accessory portion (a part of the packaging box) can be easily performed, and the cover can be covered. The display work of the stored items can be easily performed.

本発明に基づく包装箱及び包装箱の製造方法により製造された包装箱によれば、切目線を破断して1つの分離部のみを分離すればよいので、副体部(包装箱の一部)を取り除く作業を容易に行うことができ、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行なうことができる。 According to the packaging box and the packaging box manufactured by the method for manufacturing a packaging box based on the present invention, it is only necessary to break the cut line to separate only one separation portion, so that the sub-body portion (a part of the packaging box) The work of removing the items can be easily performed, and the work of displaying the items to be stored can be easily performed.

包装箱の前方斜視図である(実施例1)。It is a front perspective view of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱の後方斜視図である(実施例1)。It is a rear perspective view of a packaging box (Example 1). 本体部の展開図である(実施例1)。It is a development view of the main body part (Example 1). 図4の要部拡大図である。It is an enlarged view of the main part of FIG. 副体部の展開図である(実施例1)。It is a development view of a sub-body part (Example 1). 包装箱の製造工程を示す説明図である(実施例1)。It is explanatory drawing which shows the manufacturing process of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱の製造工程を示す説明図である(実施例1)。It is explanatory drawing which shows the manufacturing process of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱の製造工程を示す説明図である(実施例1)。It is explanatory drawing which shows the manufacturing process of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱の製造工程を示す説明図である(実施例1)。It is explanatory drawing which shows the manufacturing process of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例1)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例1)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例1)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱の使用状態を示す図であり、副体部を閉状態にした際の包装箱の底面図である(実施例1)。It is a figure which shows the use state of the packaging box, and is the bottom view of the packaging box when the accessory part is closed (Example 1). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例1)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例1)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例1)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例1)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例1)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 1). 包装箱における効果を説明するための説明図である(実施例1)。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect in a packaging box (Example 1). 図19との比較例を示す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example with FIG. 本体部の他の例を示す展開図である(実施例1)。It is a development view which shows the other example of the main body part (Example 1). 包装箱の他の例を示す展開図である(実施例1)。It is a development drawing which shows the other example of a packaging box (Example 1). 副体部の他の例を示す展開図である(実施例1)。It is a development view which shows the other example of the accessory part (Example 1). 包装箱の他の例を示す展開図である(実施例1)。It is a development drawing which shows the other example of a packaging box (Example 1). 本体部の他の例を示す展開図である(実施例1)。It is a development view which shows the other example of the main body part (Example 1). 副体部の他の例を示す展開図である(実施例1)。It is a development view which shows the other example of the accessory part (Example 1). 包装箱の前方斜視図である(実施例2)。It is a front perspective view of a packaging box (Example 2). 包装箱の後方斜視図である(実施例2)。It is a rear perspective view of a packaging box (Example 2). 本体部の展開図である(実施例2)。It is a development view of the main body part (Example 2). 副体部の展開図である(実施例2)。It is a development view of a sub-body part (Example 2). 包装箱の製造工程を示す説明図である(実施例2)。It is explanatory drawing which shows the manufacturing process of a packaging box (Example 2). 包装箱の製造工程を示す説明図である(実施例2)。It is explanatory drawing which shows the manufacturing process of a packaging box (Example 2). 包装箱の製造工程を示す説明図である(実施例2)。It is explanatory drawing which shows the manufacturing process of a packaging box (Example 2). 包装箱の製造工程を示す説明図である(実施例2)。It is explanatory drawing which shows the manufacturing process of a packaging box (Example 2). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例2)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 2). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例2)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 2). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例2)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 2). 包装箱の使用状態を示す図であり、副体部を閉状態にした際の包装箱の底面図である(実施例2)。It is a figure which shows the use state of the packaging box, and is the bottom view of the packaging box when the accessory part is closed (Example 2). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例2)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 2). 包装箱の使用状態を示す斜視図である(実施例2)。It is a perspective view which shows the use state of a packaging box (Example 2). 包装箱における効果を説明するための説明図である(実施例2)。It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect in a packaging box (Example 2). 図35との比較例を示す説明図である。It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example with FIG. 35. 副体部の他の例を示す展開図である(実施例2)。It is a development view which shows the other example of the accessory part (Example 2).

本発明においては、被収納物を包装するための包装箱で、包装箱の一部を取り除くことにより被収納物を陳列することができる包装箱において、包装箱の一部を取り除く作業を容易に行うことができ、よって、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行なうことができる包装箱を提供するという目的を以下のようにして実現した。 In the present invention, in a packaging box for packaging an object to be stored, in a packaging box in which the object to be stored can be displayed by removing a part of the packaging box, the work of removing a part of the packaging box can be easily performed. Therefore, the purpose of providing a packaging box capable of easily performing the display work of the items to be stored has been realized as follows.

本発明の実施例1に基づく包装箱1は、図1〜図5に示すように構成され、包装箱1は、本体部3と、本体部3に接着して取り付けられた副体部101とを有している。 The packaging box 1 based on the first embodiment of the present invention is configured as shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, and the packaging box 1 includes a main body portion 3 and a sub-body portion 101 bonded and attached to the main body portion 3. have.

本体部3と副体部101は、それぞれ、1枚のシート状のブランク(具体的には、段ボール製(例えば、薄型段ボール製)のブランクであり、厚紙製のブランク等の他の紙製のブランクでもよい)により形成されている。つまり、包装箱1は、段ボール材(特に、両面段ボール材)等の紙製の包装箱である。段ボールにおける断面略波形形状の中芯の段の方向は、図3、図5における円内に示す方向となっていて、本体部3においては、折れ線C1〜C4と平行になっていて(なお、段ボールにおける中芯の段の方向はこれには限られない)、副体部101においては、折れ線C11、C12と直角の方向になっている。なお、段ボールにおける中芯の段の方向はこれには限られない)。 Each of the main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101 is a blank in the form of a sheet (specifically, a blank made of corrugated cardboard (for example, made of thin corrugated cardboard), and is made of another paper such as a cardboard blank. It may be blank). That is, the packaging box 1 is a paper packaging box such as a corrugated cardboard material (particularly, a double-sided corrugated cardboard material). The direction of the step of the core having a substantially corrugated cross section in the cardboard is the direction shown in the circle in FIGS. 3 and 5, and in the main body 3, it is parallel to the polygonal lines C1 to C4 (note that it should be noted). The direction of the step of the core in the cardboard is not limited to this), and in the sub-body portion 101, the direction is perpendicular to the polygonal lines C11 and C12. The direction of the core step in corrugated cardboard is not limited to this).

本体部3は、全体に上部が開口した容器状を呈し、図1〜図4等に示すように、スリーブ状部(側面構成部)5と、底面部50とを有している。スリーブ状部5は、包装箱1の組立て状態では、底面部50の周囲から立設して形成され、正面部10と、側面部20と、側面部30と、背面部40と、糊代部49とを有し、正面部10、側面部20、背面部40、側面部30、糊代部49の順に折れ線を介して連設されている。つまり、側面部20は、正面部10から折れ線C1を介して連設され、背面部40は、側面部20から折れ線C2を介して連設され、側面部30は、背面部40から折れ線C3を介して連設され、糊代部49は、側面部30から折れ線C4を介して連設されている。折れ線C1〜C4は、本体部3の展開状態において、互いに平行であり、いずれも直線状を呈している。 The main body portion 3 has a container shape with an open upper portion as a whole, and has a sleeve-shaped portion (side surface constituent portion) 5 and a bottom surface portion 50 as shown in FIGS. 1 to 4 and the like. The sleeve-shaped portion 5 is formed upright from the periphery of the bottom surface portion 50 in the assembled state of the packaging box 1, and has a front surface portion 10, a side surface portion 20, a side surface portion 30, a back surface portion 40, and a glue margin portion. 49 is provided, and the front portion 10, the side surface portion 20, the back surface portion 40, the side surface portion 30, and the glue margin portion 49 are connected in this order via a broken line. That is, the side surface portion 20 is continuously connected from the front surface portion 10 via the polygonal line C1, the back surface portion 40 is continuously provided from the side surface portion 20 via the polygonal line C2, and the side surface portion 30 has the polygonal line C3 from the back surface portion 40. The glue margin portion 49 is continuously provided from the side surface portion 30 via the broken line C4. The polygonal lines C1 to C4 are parallel to each other in the unfolded state of the main body 3, and both are linear.

ここで、正面部(本体部正面部)10は、方形状(具体的には、長方形状)に切欠部K10を設けることにより全体に凹状を呈し、切欠部K10を構成する辺部は、正面部10の上辺10Ta、10Tbから連設されていて、切欠部K10は、上辺10Taから連設され、略円弧状に形成された辺部10aと、辺部10aの端部から下方に向けて形成された(つまり、折れ線C1と平行に形成された)直線状の辺部10bと、辺部10bの下端から連設され、略円弧状に形成された辺部10cと、辺部10cの端部から連設され、正面部10の下辺(第1片部60との間の折れ線C6に沿った辺部)と平行に形成された直線状の辺部10dと、辺部10dの端部から連設され、略円弧状に形成された辺部10eと、辺部10eの端部から上方に向けて形成された(つまり、折れ線C1と平行に形成された)直線状の辺部10fと、辺部10fの上端から上辺10Tbまで連設された略円弧状の辺部10gとを有している。切欠部K10は、正面部10の上辺から連設された辺部により形成されていて、切欠部K10は、上方に開口した切欠部となっている。辺部10aは、上辺10Taと辺部10bがなす角部を円弧状に面取りしており、辺部10gは、上辺10Tbと辺部10fがなす角部を円弧状に面取りしている。以上のように、切欠部K10を構成する辺部は、略U字状を呈している。正面部10は、上下方向の中心線を介して左右対称に形成されている。 Here, the front portion (front portion of the main body portion) 10 has a concave shape as a whole by providing the notch portion K10 in a rectangular shape (specifically, a rectangular shape), and the side portion constituting the notch portion K10 is the front surface. The cutout portion K10 is continuously connected from the upper side 10Ta and 10Tb of the portion 10, and is continuously connected from the upper side 10Ta and is formed with the side portion 10a formed in a substantially arc shape and the side portion 10a downward from the end portion. A straight side portion 10b (that is, formed parallel to the bending line C1), a side portion 10c connected from the lower end of the side portion 10b and formed in a substantially arc shape, and an end portion of the side portion 10c. A straight side portion 10d formed in parallel with the lower side of the front portion 10 (a side portion along the bending line C6 between the first piece portion 60) and a continuous portion from the end portion of the side portion 10d. A side portion 10e formed in a substantially arc shape, a linear side portion 10f formed upward from the end portion of the side portion 10e (that is, formed parallel to the bending line C1), and a side portion. It has a substantially arcuate side portion 10g continuous from the upper end of the portion 10f to the upper side 10Tb. The cutout portion K10 is formed by side portions continuously provided from the upper side of the front surface portion 10, and the cutout portion K10 is a notch portion opened upward. The side portion 10a chamfers the corner portion formed by the upper side portion 10Ta and the side portion 10b in an arc shape, and the side portion 10g chamfers the corner portion formed by the upper side portion 10Tb and the side portion 10f in an arc shape. As described above, the side portion constituting the notch portion K10 has a substantially U-shape. The front surface portion 10 is formed symmetrically with respect to the center line in the vertical direction.

正面部10の2つの上辺10Ta、10Tbにおいて、上辺10Taは、正面部10の左側面側に設けられ、上辺10Tbは、正面部10の右側面側に設けられ、上辺10Taと上辺10Tbは、同じ高さに形成され(つまり、正面部10の下辺に平行な同一直線状に形成されている)、上辺10Taは、側面部20の上辺よりも若干高い位置に形成されている。つまり、上辺10Taと正面部10の下辺間の長さL10は、側面部20の上辺と下辺間の長さL20よりも若干長く形成されている。つまり、副体部101の正面部110を正面部10の内側に差し込んで副体部101を閉状態にした際に正面部110の上端位置と正面部10の上辺10Ta、10Tbとを一致させるには、副体部101の上面部150の突状部144、146が側面部20の上辺の上に接することから正面部110の上端位置は、副体部101のブランクの厚み分だけ側面部20の上辺よりも上側位置となるため、上辺10Taを側面部20の上辺よりも高い位置にする必要がある。 In the two upper sides 10Ta and 10Tb of the front portion 10, the upper side 10Ta is provided on the left side surface side of the front portion 10, the upper side 10Tb is provided on the right side surface side of the front portion 10, and the upper side 10Ta and the upper side 10Tb are the same. It is formed at a height (that is, formed in the same linear shape parallel to the lower side of the front surface portion 10), and the upper side 10Ta is formed at a position slightly higher than the upper side of the side surface portion 20. That is, the length L10 between the upper side 10Ta and the lower side of the front surface portion 10 is formed to be slightly longer than the length L20 between the upper side and the lower side of the side surface portion 20. That is, when the front portion 110 of the sub-body portion 101 is inserted inside the front portion 10 to close the sub-body portion 101, the upper end position of the front portion 110 and the upper side 10Ta and 10Tb of the front portion 10 are matched. Since the protruding portions 144 and 146 of the upper surface portion 150 of the sub-body portion 101 are in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 20, the upper end position of the front surface portion 110 is the side surface portion 20 by the thickness of the blank of the sub-body portion 101. Since the position is higher than the upper side, it is necessary to set the upper side 10Ta to a position higher than the upper side of the side surface portion 20.

正面部10は、上記のように形成されているので、正面部10は、正面部10の下辺に沿って形成された横方向部12と、横方向部12の左右両側の端部から連設され上方に形成された縦方向部14、16とを有し、縦方向部14は、正面部10の左側面側の端部に沿って形成され、縦方向部16は、正面部10の右側面側の端部に沿って形成されている。なお、横方向部12と縦方向部14の境界は、辺部10bの延長線上にあり、横方向部12と縦方向部16の境界は、辺部10fの延長線上にあるとする。 Since the front surface portion 10 is formed as described above, the front surface portion 10 is connected to the lateral portion 12 formed along the lower side of the front surface portion 10 and the end portions on both the left and right sides of the lateral direction portion 12. It has vertical portions 14 and 16 formed above the front portion 10, the vertical portion 14 is formed along the end portion on the left side surface side of the front surface portion 10, and the vertical direction portion 16 is formed along the right side portion of the front surface portion 10. It is formed along the end on the face side. It is assumed that the boundary between the horizontal direction portion 12 and the vertical direction portion 14 is on the extension line of the side portion 10b, and the boundary between the horizontal direction portion 12 and the vertical direction portion 16 is on the extension line of the side portion 10f.

正面部10が上記のように形成されているので、副体部101の正面部110を正面部10の内側に差し込んで副体部101を閉状態にした際には、正面部110の辺部が正面部10の背面側に位置し、正面部110の辺部が正面部10によりカバーされて露出しないようになっている。つまり、副体部101を閉状態にした際には、正面部110の辺部110cが、横方向部12の背面側に位置してカバーされ、正面部110の辺部110a、110bが、縦方向部14の背面側に位置してカバーされ、正面部110の辺部110d、110eが、縦方向部16の背面側に位置してカバーされる。これにより、正面部110の辺部との間に隙間が生じないので、ゴミや埃が入り込むのを防止することができる。なお、副体部101を閉状態にした際には、正面部110の先端側の辺部である辺部110cは底面部50の上面に接するが、横方向部12の背面側にも位置しているといえる。 Since the front portion 10 is formed as described above, when the front portion 110 of the sub-body portion 101 is inserted inside the front portion 10 to close the sub-body portion 101, the side portion of the front portion 110 is formed. Is located on the back side of the front portion 10, and the side portion of the front portion 110 is covered by the front portion 10 so as not to be exposed. That is, when the sub-body portion 101 is closed, the side portions 110c of the front portion 110 are located and covered on the back surface side of the lateral portion 12, and the side portions 110a and 110b of the front portion 110 are vertically formed. The side portions 110d and 110e of the front portion 110 are located and covered on the back side of the vertical portion 16. As a result, there is no gap between the front portion 110 and the side portion, so that it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering. When the sub-body portion 101 is closed, the side portion 110c, which is the side portion on the distal end side of the front portion 110, is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 50, but is also located on the back surface side of the lateral portion 12. It can be said that it is.

なお、切欠部K10の形状は、上記には限られず、正面部10の両側の上辺から連設された辺部により構成された上方が開口した切欠部であればよく、該切欠部を有する正面部10により閉状態の副体部101の正面部110の辺部がカバーされる構成であればよい。例えば、切欠部K10を構成する辺部が、辺部10c〜10eを1つの円弧状としたU字状としてもよく、また、略V字状としてもよい。 The shape of the cutout portion K10 is not limited to the above, and may be any cutout portion having an open upper portion formed by side portions connected from the upper sides on both sides of the front surface portion 10, and the front surface having the cutout portion. The configuration may be such that the side portion of the front portion 110 of the closed subbody portion 101 is covered by the portion 10. For example, the side portion constituting the cutout portion K10 may have a U-shape having the side portions 10c to 10e as one arc shape, or may have a substantially V-shape.

また、上記の説明では、正面部10に切欠部K10が形成されているとしたが、切欠部の代わりに開口部を形成して、該開口部から商品を視認できるようにしてもよい。その場合には、正面部10の上辺は、正面部10の右側面側の端部から左側面側の端部まで形成されることになる。 Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the notch K10 is formed in the front portion 10, but an opening may be formed instead of the notch so that the product can be visually recognized from the opening. In that case, the upper side of the front surface portion 10 is formed from the end portion on the right side surface side of the front surface portion 10 to the end portion on the left side surface side.

なお、正面部10は方形状に切欠部K10を設けた構成であるとしたが、厳密には、該方形状において、左右の上端の角部には略円弧状の辺部が設けられ、該角部が小さく略円弧状に面取りされている。側面部20の上辺は、正面部10の上辺における該略円弧状の辺部から連設されている。 The front portion 10 is configured to have a notch K10 in a square shape, but strictly speaking, in the square shape, substantially arcuate side portions are provided at the upper left and right corners. The corners are small and chamfered in a substantially arc shape. The upper side of the side surface portion 20 is continuously provided from the substantially arcuate side portion on the upper side of the front surface portion 10.

また、正面部10において、縦方向部14、16の構成を省略して、正面部110の辺部110a、110eを折れ線C11に対して直角として、副体部101を閉状態にした際に、辺部110aと側面部20との隙間が設けられず、辺部110eと側面部30との隙間が設けられないようにして、正面部110の先端側の辺部110cが横方向部12の背面側に位置するようにしてもよい。 Further, in the front portion 10, when the configuration of the vertical portions 14 and 16 is omitted and the side portions 110a and 110e of the front portion 110 are set at right angles to the polygonal line C11 and the sub-body portion 101 is closed. The side portion 110c on the front end side of the front portion 110 is the back surface of the lateral portion 12 so that the gap between the side portion 110a and the side surface portion 20 is not provided and the gap between the side portion 110e and the side surface portion 30 is not provided. It may be located on the side.

また、側面部20は、正面部10の左側面側の端部から折れ線C1を介して連設され、方形状(具体的には、長方形状)を呈している。つまり、側面部20の上辺は、側面部20の下辺(第2片部70との間の折れ線C7に沿った辺部)と平行に形成され、側面部20の上辺は、直線状に形成されている。 Further, the side surface portion 20 is continuously provided from the end portion on the left side surface side of the front surface portion 10 via the polygonal line C1 and has a rectangular shape (specifically, a rectangular shape). That is, the upper side of the side surface portion 20 is formed in parallel with the lower side of the side surface portion 20 (the side portion along the polygonal line C7 between the second piece portion 70), and the upper side of the side surface portion 20 is formed in a straight line. ing.

また、側面部30は、背面部40の右側面側の端部から折れ線C3を介して連設され、側面部20と同大同形状に形成されている。側面部30の上辺は、側面部30の下辺(第3片部80との間の折れ線C9に沿った辺部)と平行に形成され、側面部30の上辺は、直線状に形成されている。なお、側面部20の上辺は下辺と平行で、側面部30の上辺は下辺と平行であるとしたが、下辺と平行でなくてもよく、下辺に対して傾斜していてもよい。 Further, the side surface portion 30 is continuously provided from the end portion on the right side surface side of the back surface portion 40 via the polygonal line C3, and is formed in the same shape as the side surface portion 20. The upper side of the side surface portion 30 is formed in parallel with the lower side of the side surface portion 30 (the side portion along the polygonal line C9 between the third piece portion 80), and the upper side of the side surface portion 30 is formed in a straight line. .. Although the upper side of the side surface portion 20 is parallel to the lower side and the upper side of the side surface portion 30 is parallel to the lower side, it may not be parallel to the lower side and may be inclined with respect to the lower side.

なお、本体部第1側面部が左側面側で本体部第2側面部が右側面側とした場合には、側面部20は本体部第1側面部となり、側面部30が本体部第2側面部となり、逆に、本体部第1側面部が右側面側で本体部第2側面部が左側面側とした場合には、側面部20は本体部第2側面部となり、側面部30が本体部第1側面部となる。 When the first side surface portion of the main body portion is on the left side surface side and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is on the right side surface side, the side surface portion 20 is the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the side surface portion 30 is the second side surface portion of the main body portion. On the contrary, when the first side surface portion of the main body portion is on the right side surface side and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is on the left side surface side, the side surface portion 20 becomes the second side surface portion of the main body portion and the side surface portion 30 becomes the main body portion. It becomes the first side surface part.

また、背面部(本体部背面部)40は、側面部20の背面側の端部から折れ線C2を介して連設され、方形状(具体的には、長方形状)における上側の一部を切り欠いた形状を呈し、背面部40の上辺40Ta、40Tb、40Tcは、同じ高さに形成され(つまり、背面部40の下辺に平行な同一直線状に形成されている)、側面部20の上辺や側面部30の上辺と同じ高さに形成されている。背面部40の上端には、上辺から連設された2つの切欠部K40、K42が形成されていて、切欠部K40は、上辺40Taと上辺40Tb間に形成され、切欠部K42は、上辺40Tbと上辺40Tc間に形成されている。切欠部K40と切欠部K42は、背面部40の上下方向の中心線を介して左右対称の位置に形成されている。 Further, the back surface portion (rear surface portion of the main body portion) 40 is continuously provided from the end portion on the back surface side of the side surface portion 20 via the polygonal line C2, and a part of the upper side in a rectangular shape (specifically, a rectangular shape) is cut off. The upper side 40Ta, 40Tb, 40Tc of the back surface 40 is formed at the same height (that is, formed in the same linear shape parallel to the lower side of the back surface 40), and the upper side of the side surface 20 is formed in a missing shape. It is formed at the same height as the upper side of the side surface portion 30. At the upper end of the back surface portion 40, two notches K40 and K42 continuously provided from the upper side are formed, the notch portion K40 is formed between the upper side 40Ta and the upper side 40Tb, and the notch portion K42 is formed with the upper side 40Tb. It is formed between the upper 40 Tc. The cutout portion K40 and the cutout portion K42 are formed at symmetrical positions via the vertical center line of the back surface portion 40.

切欠部K40は、上辺40Taの端部から略円弧状に形成された辺部40aと、辺部40aの端部から下方に形成された直線状の辺部40bと、辺部40bの下端から横方向に形成された直線状の辺部40cと、辺部40cの端部から上方に形成された直線状の辺部40dと、上辺40Tbの端部と辺部40dの上端との間に略円弧状に形成された辺部40eとを有し、辺部40cにおける左右方向の略中央位置からは位置合わせ確認用の切込み40fが上下方向に形成されている。 The cutout portion K40 has a side portion 40a formed in a substantially arc shape from the end portion of the upper side portion 40Ta, a linear side portion 40b formed downward from the end portion of the side portion 40a, and a lateral portion from the lower end of the side portion 40b. A substantially circular circle between the linear side portion 40c formed in the direction, the linear side portion 40d formed upward from the end portion of the side portion 40c, and the end portion of the upper side 40Tb and the upper end of the side portion 40d. It has a side portion 40e formed in an arc shape, and a notch 40f for confirming alignment is formed in the vertical direction from a substantially central position in the left-right direction on the side portion 40c.

また、切欠部K42は、上辺40Tbの端部から略円弧状に形成された辺部42aと、辺部42aの端部から下方に形成された直線状の辺部42bと、辺部42bの下端から横方向に形成された直線状の辺部42cと、辺部42cの端部から上方に形成された直線状の辺部42dと、上辺40Tcの端部と辺部42dの上端との間に略円弧状に形成された辺部42eとを有し、辺部42cにおける左右方向の略中央位置からは位置合わせ確認用の切込み42fが上下方向に形成されている。なお、切込み40f、42fは、背面部40の一方の面から他方の面まで貫通している。 Further, the cutout portion K42 has a side portion 42a formed in a substantially arc shape from the end portion of the upper side 40Tb, a linear side portion 42b formed downward from the end portion of the side portion 42a, and a lower end portion of the side portion 42b. Between the linear side portion 42c formed laterally from the side, the linear side portion 42d formed upward from the end portion of the side portion 42c, and the end portion of the upper side 40Tc and the upper end of the side portion 42d. It has a side portion 42e formed in a substantially arc shape, and a notch 42f for confirming alignment is formed in the vertical direction from a substantially central position in the left-right direction of the side portion 42c. The cuts 40f and 42f penetrate from one surface of the back surface portion 40 to the other surface.

また、背面部40には、背面部40の下辺の一部(つまり、背面部40の下辺における切目線K44の両端の端部間の辺部(下辺部分)44a)と切目線K44により囲まれた分離部44が設けられ、切目線K44は、横方向に間隔を介して設けられた円弧状の切目線K44aと切目線K44c(切目線K44aと切目線K44cは、上下方向の中心線を介して左右対称に形成されている)と、切目線K44aの上端と切目線K44cの上端を結ぶ横方向(背面部40の下辺と平行な方向)の直線状の切目線K44bとを有し、切目線K44a、K44cの下端は、背面部40の下辺に接している。つまり、切目線K44の両側の端部が背面部40の下辺に接している。切目線K44bは、背面部40における上下方向の略中央位置に形成されている。切目線K44a、K44cは、ミシン目状の切目線(間隔をおきながら連続して形成された切込みにより形成された切目線)であり、切目線K44bは、連続した切込みからなる切目線である。つまり、切目線K44は、全体として、切断予定線である。切目線K44を構成する切目線K44a〜K44cは、背面部40の一方の面から他方の面まで貫通している。なお、背面部40の下辺は、第4片部90と連設された部分では第4片部90との折れ線C8−1、C8−2と一致しており、辺部44aと折れ線C8−1と折れ線C8−2は、同一直線上にある。 Further, the back surface portion 40 is surrounded by a part of the lower side of the back surface portion 40 (that is, the side portion (lower side portion) 44a between the ends of the cut line K44 at the lower side of the back surface portion 40) and the cut line K44. A separation portion 44 is provided, and the cut line K44 is provided with an arcuate cut line K44a and a cut line K44c provided with a lateral spacing. The cut line K44b has a horizontal direction (a direction parallel to the lower side of the back surface 40) connecting the upper end of the cut line K44a and the upper end of the cut line K44c. The lower ends of the line of sight K44a and K44c are in contact with the lower side of the back surface portion 40. That is, the ends on both sides of the cut line K44 are in contact with the lower side of the back surface portion 40. The cut line K44b is formed at a substantially central position in the vertical direction on the back surface portion 40. The cut lines K44a and K44c are perforated cut lines (cut lines formed by continuously formed cuts at intervals), and the cut lines K44b are cut lines composed of continuous cuts. That is, the cut line K44 is a planned cutting line as a whole. The cut lines K44a to K44c constituting the cut line K44 penetrate from one surface to the other surface of the back surface portion 40. The lower side of the back surface portion 40 coincides with the polygonal lines C8-1 and C8-2 with the fourth piece portion 90 in the portion connected to the fourth piece portion 90, and the side portion 44a and the polygonal line C8-1. And the polygonal line C8-2 are on the same straight line.

背面部40は、分離部44と、背面部40における分離部44以外の領域である本体部(背面本体部)42とを有しており、上記切欠部K40、K42は、本体部42に形成されている。背面部40は、切目線K44を含めて、上下方向の中心線を介して左右対称に形成されている。 The back surface portion 40 has a separation portion 44 and a main body portion (rear surface main body portion) 42 which is a region other than the separation portion 44 in the back surface portion 40, and the cutout portions K40 and K42 are formed in the main body portion 42. Has been done. The back surface portion 40 is formed symmetrically with respect to the center line in the vertical direction, including the cut line K44.

また、糊代部49は、側面部30の正面側の端部から折れ線C4を介して連設され、縦方向に細長の略帯状台形形状を呈している。この糊代部49は、その内側の面が正面部10の右側面側の端部領域の外側の面に接着されている。糊代部49が正面部10の外側の面に接着されているのは、副体部101を閉状態にすべく正面部110を正面部10の内側の面に沿って差し込む際に、支障とならないようにするためである。糊代部49を正面部10の内側の面に接着してもよいが、副体部101を閉状態にするべく正面部110を正面部10の内側に差し込むことを考慮すると、正面部10の外側の面に接着するのが好ましい。なお、糊代部49を正面部10の側面部20とは反対側の辺部から連設してもよい。 Further, the glue margin portion 49 is continuously provided from the front end portion of the side surface portion 30 via the polygonal line C4, and has a substantially strip-shaped trapezoidal shape elongated in the vertical direction. The inner surface of the glue margin portion 49 is adhered to the outer surface of the end region on the right side surface side of the front surface portion 10. The reason why the glue margin portion 49 is adhered to the outer surface of the front portion 10 is that it is an obstacle when the front portion 110 is inserted along the inner surface of the front portion 10 in order to close the auxiliary body portion 101. This is to prevent it from becoming. The glue margin portion 49 may be adhered to the inner surface of the front portion 10, but considering that the front portion 110 is inserted inside the front portion 10 in order to close the auxiliary body portion 101, the front portion 10 may be adhered. It is preferable to adhere to the outer surface. The glue margin portion 49 may be continuously provided from the side portion of the front surface portion 10 opposite to the side surface portion 20.

なお、本体部3の展開状態において、折れ線C6、C7、C8−1、C8−2、C9は同一直線上に形成されている。 In the unfolded state of the main body 3, the polygonal lines C6, C7, C8-1, C8-2, and C9 are formed on the same straight line.

また、底面部50は、いわゆるワンタッチ底であり、第1片部(底面部第1片部)60と、第2片部(底面部第2片部)70と、第3片部(底面部第3片部)80と、第4片部(底面部第4片部)90とを有し、包装箱1の組立て状態においては、図13に示すように、略方形状の外形を呈している。 Further, the bottom surface portion 50 is a so-called one-touch bottom, and is a first piece portion (bottom portion first piece portion) 60, a second piece portion (bottom portion second piece portion) 70, and a third piece portion (bottom surface portion). It has a third piece (3rd piece) 80 and a 4th piece (bottom part 4th piece) 90, and in the assembled state of the packaging box 1, it exhibits a substantially rectangular outer shape as shown in FIG. There is.

ここで、第1片部60は、正面部10の下端から折れ線C6を介して連設され、先端側にいくほど幅狭となる略台形形状に形成され、その上面の一部が本体部3の内底面の一部を形成している。この第1片部60は、底面部50の組立て状態においては、第4片部90と底面部50の中心位置(底面部50の対角の角部を結ぶ2つの直線の交点)を介して点対称に形成されている。なお、底面部50を組み立てた際には、第2片部70の切欠部K72と第3片部82の切欠部K82が係合した状態となり、その際、第1辺部60の辺部60aが先端部74の辺部74aに沿った状態となるが、切欠部K72が切欠部K82と係合する際に辺部60aが支障とならないように、辺部60aにおける第1片部60の先端側には、切欠部K60が形成されている。 Here, the first piece portion 60 is continuously provided from the lower end of the front portion 10 via the polygonal line C6, and is formed into a substantially trapezoidal shape that becomes narrower toward the tip side, and a part of the upper surface thereof is the main body portion 3. It forms a part of the inner bottom surface of. In the assembled state of the bottom surface portion 50, the first piece portion 60 is provided via the center position of the fourth piece portion 90 and the bottom surface portion 50 (the intersection of two straight lines connecting the diagonal corner portions of the bottom surface portion 50). It is formed point-symmetrically. When the bottom surface portion 50 is assembled, the cutout portion K72 of the second piece portion 70 and the notch portion K82 of the third piece portion 82 are in an engaged state, and at that time, the side portion 60a of the first side portion 60 is engaged. Is in a state along the side portion 74a of the tip portion 74, but the tip of the first piece portion 60 in the side portion 60a is provided so that the side portion 60a does not interfere with the engagement of the notch portion K72 with the notch portion K82. A notch K60 is formed on the side.

また、第2片部70は、側面部20の下端から折れ線C7を介して連設され、略長方形状に形成され、第2片部70の上面の一部が本体部3の内底面の一部を形成している。また、第2片部70の角部(正面部10と側面部20の境界位置の下端)からは第2片部70の側面部20との境界をなす辺部(つまり、折れ線C7に沿った辺部)に対して斜めに折れ線70−1(この折れ線70−1は、上面側が山折れ線となっている)が形成されている。第2片部70は、折れ線70−1を介して本体部72と先端部74とに区画される。本体部72の先端の先端部74側には、他方の本体部82と互いに係止するように切欠部K72が形成されている。先端部74の上面は、第1片部60の下面に接着されている。 Further, the second piece portion 70 is continuously provided from the lower end of the side surface portion 20 via the polygonal line C7 and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and a part of the upper surface of the second piece portion 70 is one of the inner bottom surfaces of the main body portion 3. Forming a part. Further, from the corner portion of the second piece portion 70 (the lower end of the boundary position between the front portion 10 and the side surface portion 20), the side portion forming the boundary with the side surface portion 20 of the second piece portion 70 (that is, along the polygonal line C7). A polygonal line 70-1 (the polygonal line 70-1 has a mountain fold line on the upper surface side) is formed diagonally with respect to the side portion). The second piece 70 is divided into a main body 72 and a tip 74 via a polygonal line 70-1. A notch K72 is formed on the tip end portion 74 side of the tip end portion of the main body portion 72 so as to engage with the other main body portion 82. The upper surface of the tip portion 74 is adhered to the lower surface of the first piece portion 60.

また、第3片部80は、側面部30の下端から折れ線C9を介して連設され、底面部50の組立て状態においては、第2片部70と底面部50の中心位置を介して略点対称に形成されている。つまり、第3片部80は、切欠部K84が設けられている点以外は、第2片部70と点対称に形成されている。すなわち、第3片部80は、側面部30の下端から折れ線C9を介して連設され、略長方形状に形成され、第3片部80の上面の一部が本体部3の内底面の一部を形成している。また、第3片部80の角部(側面部30と背面部40の境界位置の下端)からは第3片部80の側面部30との境界をなす辺部(つまり、折れ線C9に沿った辺部)に対して斜めに折れ線80−1(この折れ線80−1は、上面側が山折れ線となっている)が形成されている。第3片部80は、折れ線80−1を介して本体部82と先端部84とに区画される。本体部82の先端の先端部84側には、他方の本体部72と互いに係止するように切欠部K82が形成されている。先端部84の上面は、第1片部60の下面に接着されている。また、先端部84の辺部84aには、第4片部90の開口部K92と干渉しないように、切欠部K84が形成されている。 Further, the third piece portion 80 is continuously provided from the lower end of the side surface portion 30 via the polygonal line C9, and in the assembled state of the bottom surface portion 50, the third piece portion 80 is abbreviated point via the center position of the second piece portion 70 and the bottom surface portion 50. It is formed symmetrically. That is, the third piece portion 80 is formed point-symmetrically with the second piece portion 70, except that the cutout portion K84 is provided. That is, the third piece portion 80 is continuously provided from the lower end of the side surface portion 30 via the polygonal line C9 and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and a part of the upper surface of the third piece portion 80 is one of the inner bottom surfaces of the main body portion 3. Forming a part. Further, from the corner portion of the third piece portion 80 (the lower end of the boundary position between the side surface portion 30 and the back surface portion 40), the side portion forming the boundary with the side surface portion 30 of the third piece portion 80 (that is, along the polygonal line C9). A polygonal line 80-1 (the polygonal line 80-1 has a mountain fold line on the upper surface side) is formed diagonally with respect to the side portion). The third piece portion 80 is divided into a main body portion 82 and a tip portion 84 via a polygonal line 80-1. A notch K82 is formed on the tip 84 side of the tip of the main body 82 so as to be engaged with the other main body 72. The upper surface of the tip portion 84 is adhered to the lower surface of the first piece portion 60. Further, a notch K84 is formed in the side portion 84a of the tip portion 84 so as not to interfere with the opening K92 of the fourth piece portion 90.

また、第4片部90は、背面部40の下端から折れ線C8−1、C8−2を介して連設され、先端側にいくほど幅狭となる略台形形状に形成され、その上面の一部が本体部3の内底面の一部を形成している。なお、切欠部K82が切欠部K72と係合する際に辺部90aが支障とならないように、辺部90aにおける第4片部90の先端側には、切欠部K90が形成されている。 Further, the fourth piece 90 is continuously provided from the lower end of the back surface 40 via the polygonal lines C8-1 and C8-2, and is formed into a substantially trapezoidal shape that becomes narrower toward the tip side, and is one of the upper surfaces thereof. The portion forms a part of the inner bottom surface of the main body portion 3. A notch K90 is formed on the tip end side of the fourth piece 90 in the side 90a so that the side 90a does not interfere when the notch K82 engages with the notch K72.

また、第4片部90の背面部40側の端部領域には、背面部40の下辺に沿って開口部93が形成されている。すなわち、開口部93は、第4片部90に形成された切欠部K92を構成する辺部92と背面部40の下辺(つまり、辺部44a)により囲まれており、開口部93は、背面部40の下辺に沿って横長に形成されている。ここで、辺部92は、折れ線C8−1の端部から連設され、折れ線C8−1に対して直角方向に形成された直線状の辺部92aと、辺部92aから連設され略円弧状の辺部92bと、辺部92bの端部から連設され背面部40の下辺と平行な直線状の辺部92cと、辺部92cの端部から連設され略円弧状の辺部92dと、辺部92dの端部から連設され折れ線C8−2の端部まで折れ線C8−2に対して直角方向に形成された辺部92eとを有している。この開口部93により、切目線K44を破断する際に分離部44の内側の下端領域に指を係止しやすくなっている。なお、切目線K44の両側の端部間の辺部44aにおける全ての範囲が開口部93の辺部を構成しているが、開口部93の左右方向の長さを短くして、辺部44aの一部が開口部93の辺部を構成するようにしてもよい。つまり、開口部93は、下辺部分44aにおける少なくとも一部を辺部とする開口部であればよい。底面部50の組立て状態においては、第4片部90は、切欠部K92が設けられている点以外は、第1片部60と底面部50の中心位置を介して略点対称に形成されている。 Further, an opening 93 is formed along the lower side of the back surface portion 40 in the end region on the back surface portion 40 side of the fourth piece portion 90. That is, the opening 93 is surrounded by the side portion 92 constituting the cutout portion K92 formed in the fourth piece portion 90 and the lower side (that is, the side portion 44a) of the back surface portion 40, and the opening portion 93 is the back surface. It is formed horizontally along the lower side of the portion 40. Here, the side portion 92 is continuously provided from the end of the folding line C8-1, and is connected to the linear side portion 92a formed in the direction perpendicular to the folding line C8-1 and the side portion 92a, which is a substantially circular circle. An arc-shaped side portion 92b, a linear side portion 92c connected from the end portion of the side portion 92b and parallel to the lower side of the back surface portion 40, and a substantially arc-shaped side portion 92d connected from the end portion of the side portion 92c. And the side portion 92e which is continuously provided from the end portion of the side portion 92d and is formed in the direction perpendicular to the folding line C8-2 from the end portion of the folding line C8-2. The opening 93 makes it easy to lock a finger to the inner lower end region of the separation portion 44 when breaking the cut line K44. Although the entire range of the side portion 44a between the ends on both sides of the cut line K44 constitutes the side portion of the opening portion 93, the length of the opening portion 93 in the left-right direction is shortened so that the side portion 44a is formed. A part of the opening 93 may form a side portion of the opening 93. That is, the opening 93 may be an opening having at least a part of the lower side portion 44a as a side portion. In the assembled state of the bottom surface portion 50, the fourth piece portion 90 is formed substantially point-symmetrically via the center positions of the first piece portion 60 and the bottom surface portion 50, except that the cutout portion K92 is provided. There is.

以上のように、底面部50において、隣接する2つの片部(第1片部60と第2片部70)である底面部第1片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である先端部(第1端部領域)74が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該先端部74が第1片部60に接着され、他の隣接する2つの片部(第3片部80と第4片部90)である底面部第2片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である先端部(第2端部領域)84が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該先端部84が第4片部90に接着されている。 As described above, in the bottom surface portion 50, the tip portion which is the other side portion of one of the pair of the bottom surface portion first piece portion which is two adjacent pieces (first piece portion 60 and second piece portion 70). The (first end region) 74 is bendable through a fold line, the tip 74 is adhered to the first piece 60, and the other two adjacent pieces (third piece 80 and fourth). The tip portion (second end region) 84, which is a portion on the other side of the pair of the bottom portion second piece portion 90), is bendable via a bending line, and the tip portion 84 is the second. 4 It is adhered to the piece 90.

本体部3を箱状に組み立てた状態では、正面部10と背面部40とが互いに平行になり、側面部20と側面部30とが互いに平行になり、底面部50を構成する各部材は、正面部10、側面部20、30、背面部40に対して略直角(直角でもよい)となる。つまり、スリーブ状部5は、底面部50に対して略直角(直角でもよい)となる。また、スリーブ状部5を構成する各部材(正面部10、側面部20、30、背面部40)における隣接する部材は互いに直角(略直角としてもよい)となっている。 When the main body 3 is assembled in a box shape, the front surface 10 and the back surface 40 are parallel to each other, the side surface 20 and the side surface 30 are parallel to each other, and each member constituting the bottom surface 50 is formed. The front portion 10, the side portions 20, 30 and the back portion 40 are substantially at right angles (may be right angles). That is, the sleeve-shaped portion 5 is substantially perpendicular (or may be a right angle) to the bottom surface portion 50. Further, the adjacent members in each member (front portion 10, side surface portions 20, 30, back surface portion 40) constituting the sleeve-shaped portion 5 are at right angles to each other (may be substantially right angles).

また、本体部3は、平板状に折り畳むことができ(図9参照)、本体部3においては、正面部10と側面部20との角度を小さくし(つまり、直角より小さくする)、背面部40と側面部30との角度を小さくさせる(つまり、直角より小さくする)ことにより、四角筒状のスリーブ状部5が扁平になるとともに、底面部50を構成する各部がスリーブ状部5内に回動して、本体部3を全体に平板状に折り畳むことができる。本体部3を折り畳んだ状態では、底面部50を構成する各部は、スリーブ状部5内にスリーブ状部5を構成する正面部10、側面部20、30、背面部40に対して略平行な状態となる。 Further, the main body portion 3 can be folded into a flat plate shape (see FIG. 9), and in the main body portion 3, the angle between the front portion 10 and the side surface portion 20 is made smaller (that is, smaller than a right angle), and the back portion is made smaller. By reducing the angle between the 40 and the side surface portion 30 (that is, making it smaller than a right angle), the square tubular sleeve-shaped portion 5 becomes flat, and each portion constituting the bottom surface portion 50 is contained in the sleeve-shaped portion 5. By rotating, the main body 3 can be folded into a flat plate as a whole. In the folded state of the main body portion 3, each portion constituting the bottom surface portion 50 is substantially parallel to the front portion 10, the side surface portions 20, 30 and the back surface portion 40 constituting the sleeve-shaped portion 5 in the sleeve-shaped portion 5. It becomes a state.

次に、副体部101は、主として、本体部3の分離部44と接着するとともに、本体部3の上面と正面部10の切欠部K10をカバーするためのものであり、図1、図2、図5に示すように、正面部110と、背面部140と、上面部150と、フラップ160とを有している。 Next, the sub-body portion 101 is mainly for adhering to the separating portion 44 of the main body portion 3 and for covering the upper surface of the main body portion 3 and the notched portion K10 of the front surface portion 10, and FIGS. As shown in FIG. 5, it has a front surface portion 110, a back surface portion 140, an upper surface portion 150, and a flap 160.

ここで、正面部(副体部正面部)110は、上面部150から折れ線C11を介して連設されていて、略長方形状を呈し、上面部150との折れ線C11の左側面側の端部から連設された直線状の辺部110aと、辺部110aの端部から連設された円弧状(略円弧状としてもよい)の辺部110bと、辺部110bの端部から連設された直線状の辺部110cと、辺部110cの端部から連設された円弧状(略円弧状としてもよい)の辺部110dと、辺部110dの端部から連設された直線状の辺部110eとを有している。辺部110bは、辺部110aと辺部110cがなす角部を円弧状に面取りしており、辺部110dは、辺部110eと辺部110cがなす角部を円弧状に面取りしている。 Here, the front portion (front portion of the sub-body portion) 110 is continuously provided from the upper surface portion 150 via the folding line C11, has a substantially rectangular shape, and has an end portion on the left side surface side of the folding line C11 with the upper surface portion 150. A linear side portion 110a continuously connected from the side portion 110a, an arc-shaped (may be substantially arcuate) side portion 110b continuously connected from the end portion of the side portion 110a, and a continuous arrangement from the end portion of the side portion 110b. A linear side portion 110c, an arc-shaped (may be substantially arcuate) side portion 110d connected from the end of the side portion 110c, and a linear side portion 110d connected from the end of the side portion 110d. It has a side portion 110e. The side portion 110b chamfers the corner portion formed by the side portion 110a and the side portion 110c in an arc shape, and the side portion 110d chamfers the corner portion formed by the side portion 110e and the side portion 110c in an arc shape.

ここで、辺部110cは、折れ線C11と平行に形成されており、また、辺部110aと辺部110eは、折れ線C11に対して僅かに折れ線C11側に傾斜して形成され(辺部110aと折れ線C11間の角度α11と辺部110eと折れ線C11間の角度α12は、90度よりも小さく形成されている)、辺部110aと辺部110e間の距離が正面部110の先端側に行くほど短くなるように、テーパ状に形成されている。このように、辺部110a、110eがテーパ状に形成されて、正面部110を先細りの形状とすることにより、正面部110を正面部10の内側に差し込むのを容易としている。なお、正面部110は、折れ線C11と直角方向の中心線を介して左右対称に形成されている。また、正面部110の左右方向の最大幅(上面部150側の端部における長さ)は、正面部10の内側に差し込むことができるように、背面部40や正面部10の左右方向の幅よりも若干小さく形成され、また、正面部110の基端から先端までの長さ(折れ線C11と辺部110c間の長さ)は、正面部10の上下方向の長さL10よりも若干短く形成され、副体部101を閉状態にした際に、正面部110の先端が底面部50(特に、第1片部60)の上側の面に接する長さに形成されている。副体部101の閉状態では、正面部110により切欠部K10が内側から閉じた状態となり、本体部3の正面側が閉じた状態(つまり、正面部10の内側からカバーされた状態)となる。 Here, the side portion 110c is formed in parallel with the polygonal line C11, and the side portion 110a and the side portion 110e are formed so as to be slightly inclined toward the polygonal line C11 with respect to the polygonal line C11 (with the side portion 110a). The angle α11 between the polygonal line C11 and the angle α12 between the side portion 110e and the polygonal line C11 are formed to be smaller than 90 degrees), and the distance between the side portion 110a and the side portion 110e increases toward the tip end side of the front portion 110. It is formed in a tapered shape so as to be short. As described above, the side portions 110a and 110e are formed in a tapered shape, and the front portion 110 has a tapered shape, so that the front portion 110 can be easily inserted into the inside of the front portion 10. The front portion 110 is formed symmetrically with respect to the center line in the direction perpendicular to the polygonal line C11. Further, the maximum width in the left-right direction of the front portion 110 (the length at the end portion on the upper surface portion 150 side) is the width in the left-right direction of the back portion 40 and the front portion 10 so that the front portion 110 can be inserted inside the front portion 10. The length from the base end to the tip of the front portion 110 (the length between the bent line C11 and the side portion 110c) is formed to be slightly shorter than the vertical length L10 of the front portion 10. The tip of the front surface portion 110 is formed to have a length in contact with the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 50 (particularly, the first piece portion 60) when the sub-body portion 101 is closed. In the closed state of the sub-body portion 101, the notch portion K10 is closed from the inside by the front portion 110, and the front side of the main body portion 3 is closed (that is, the state of being covered from the inside of the front portion 10).

また、背面部(副体部背面部)140は、上面部150から折れ線C12を介して連設されていて、方形状を呈し、その左右方向の長さは、正面部110の左右方向の最大幅(上面部150側の端部における長さ)と同一であり、背面部40の左右方向の長さよりも若干短くなっており、また、上下方向の長さは、背面部40の上下方向の長さ(背面部40の上辺と下辺間の長さ)と略同一に(具体的には、若干長く)形成されていて、背面部140が背面部40に接着された状態では、背面部140の下端と背面部40の下端が一致した状態となっている。なお、背面部140の上面部150側の領域には、位置合わせ確認用の切込みK140、K142が設けられている。切込みK140は、逆T字状を呈し、切込みK140は、横方向の切込みK140aと縦方向の切込みK140bとを有している。つまり、直線状の切込みK140aと直線状の切込みK140bは直角をなし、切込みK140bの下端が切込みK140aの左右方向の中央(略中央としてもよい)に接している。同様に、切込みK142は、逆T字状を呈し、切込みK142は、横方向の切込みK142aと縦方向の切込みK142bとを有している。つまり、直線状の切込みK142aと直線状の切込みK142bは直角をなし、切込みK142bの下端が切込みK142aの左右方向の中央(略中央としてもよい)に接している。なお、切込みK140、K142は、背面部140の背面側の面(包装箱1において背面側に露出した面)に表れないように、正面側から半切れとなっている。 Further, the back surface portion (rear surface portion of the sub-body portion) 140 is continuously provided from the upper surface portion 150 via the folding line C12 and has a rectangular shape, and the length in the left-right direction thereof is the maximum in the left-right direction of the front portion 110. It is largely the same (the length at the end on the upper surface 150 side), slightly shorter than the left-right length of the back surface 40, and the vertical length is the vertical length of the back surface 40. The back portion 140 is formed to be substantially the same as the length (the length between the upper side and the lower side of the back portion 40) (specifically, slightly longer), and the back portion 140 is adhered to the back portion 40. The lower end of the back portion 40 and the lower end of the back surface portion 40 are in the same state. Notches K140 and K142 for confirming alignment are provided in the area of the back surface portion 140 on the upper surface portion 150 side. The notch K140 has an inverted T shape, and the notch K140 has a horizontal notch K140a and a vertical notch K140b. That is, the linear notch K140a and the linear notch K140b form a right angle, and the lower end of the notch K140b is in contact with the center of the notch K140a in the left-right direction (may be substantially the center). Similarly, the notch K142 exhibits an inverted T shape, and the notch K142 has a lateral notch K142a and a vertical notch K142b. That is, the linear notch K142a and the linear notch K142b form a right angle, and the lower end of the notch K142b is in contact with the center of the notch K142a in the left-right direction (may be substantially the center). The cuts K140 and K142 are cut in half from the front side so as not to appear on the back side surface (the surface exposed on the back side in the packaging box 1) of the back surface portion 140.

また、上面部150は、略方形状を呈し、方形状の左側面側に突状部154、156を設けるとともに右側面側に突状部158を設けた形状を呈し、上面部150における突状部154、156、158以外の領域が本体部152となり、本体部152は方形状を呈する。本体部152の左右方向の長さは、正面部110の左右方向の最大幅と同一であり、本体部152の前後方向の長さ(折れ線C11と折れ線C12間の長さ)は、側面部20、30の前後方向の長さと同一となっている。つまり、背面部140が背面部40の背面側の面に接着され、正面部110が正面部10の内側(背面側)に差し込まれるので、本体部152の前後方向の長さは、側面部20、30の前後方向の長さと同一となっている。副体部101の閉状態では、上面部150により本体部3の上面側が閉じた(つまり、カバーされた)状態となる。なお、折れ線C11と折れ線C12は直線状を呈し互いに平行になっている。 Further, the upper surface portion 150 has a substantially rectangular shape, and has a shape in which a protruding portion 154 and 156 are provided on the left side surface side of the rectangular shape and a protruding portion 158 is provided on the right side surface side. Areas other than the portions 154, 156, and 158 become the main body portion 152, and the main body portion 152 exhibits a square shape. The length in the left-right direction of the main body portion 152 is the same as the maximum width in the left-right direction of the front portion 110, and the length in the front-rear direction of the main body portion 152 (the length between the polygonal line C11 and the polygonal line C12) is the side surface portion 20. , 30 is the same as the length in the front-back direction. That is, since the back surface portion 140 is adhered to the back surface of the back surface portion 40 and the front surface portion 110 is inserted into the inside (rear surface side) of the front surface portion 10, the length of the main body portion 152 in the front-rear direction is the side surface portion 20. , 30 is the same as the length in the front-back direction. In the closed state of the sub-body portion 101, the upper surface side of the main body portion 3 is closed (that is, covered) by the upper surface portion 150. The polygonal line C11 and the polygonal line C12 are linear and parallel to each other.

また、突状部154と突状部156は、本体部152の左側面側の辺部に沿って左側面側に突出して形成され、突状部154と突状部156は、前後方向の間隔を介して形成されている。突状部154は、副体部101の展開状態において、上面部150とフラップ160の境界位置に切込みK154を形成することにより設けられ、突状部156は、副体部101の展開状態において、上面部150とフラップ160の境界位置に切込みK156を形成することにより設けられている。ここで、切込みK154と切込みK156は同様の構成であるので、切込みK154を例にとって説明すると、切込みK154は、折れ線C13−1の背面側の端部と折れ線C13−2の正面側の端部間に設けられ、折れ線C13−1の端部から折れ線C13−1に対して鈍角の方向に直線状に形成された切込みK154aと、切込みK154aの端部から連設された略円弧状の切込みK154bと、切込みK154bの端部から連設され折れ線C13−1、C13−2の方向と平行な直線状の切込みK154cと、切込みK154cの端部から連設された略円弧状の切込みK154dと、切込みK154dの端部から折れ線C13−2の端部まで形成され、折れ線C13−2に対して鈍角の方向に直線状に形成された切込みK154eとを有している。また、切込みK156は、折れ線C13−2の背面側の端部と折れ線C13−3の正面側の端部間に設けられている。 Further, the protruding portion 154 and the protruding portion 156 are formed so as to project toward the left side surface along the side portion on the left side surface side of the main body portion 152, and the protruding portion 154 and the protruding portion 156 are spaced apart from each other in the front-rear direction. It is formed through. The protruding portion 154 is provided by forming a notch K154 at the boundary position between the upper surface portion 150 and the flap 160 in the expanded state of the sub-body portion 101, and the protruding portion 156 is provided in the expanded state of the sub-body portion 101. It is provided by forming a notch K156 at the boundary position between the upper surface portion 150 and the flap 160. Here, since the notch K154 and the notch K156 have the same configuration, if the notch K154 is described as an example, the notch K154 is located between the rear end of the polygonal line C13-1 and the front end of the polygonal line C13-2. K154a, which is provided in a straight line from the end of the polygonal line C13-1 to the polygonal line C13-1, and a substantially arcuate notch K154b, which is continuously provided from the end of the polygonal line C154a. , A linear notch K154c connected from the end of the notch K154b and parallel to the direction of the polygonal lines C13-1 and C13-2, a substantially arcuate notch K154d continuously connected from the end of the notch K154c, and a notch K154d. It has a notch K154e formed from the end portion of the polygonal line C13-2 to the end portion of the polygonal line C13-2 and formed linearly in a direction of an blunt angle with respect to the polygonal line C13-2. Further, the notch K156 is provided between the end portion on the back surface side of the polygonal line C13-2 and the end portion on the front surface side of the polygonal line C13-3.

突状部154と突状部156は、ともに先端側に行くほど幅狭(つまり、前後方向の長さが短くなる)となる略台形形状に形成され、突状部154、156の基端から先端までの長さは、副体部101を閉状態にした際(つまり、副体部101の閉状態において、上面部150は、本体部3の上面をカバーしている)、突状部154、156の内側の面(つまり、上面部150が本体部3の上面をカバーした状態では、突状部154、156の下面)が側面部20の上辺の上側にあって該上辺に接する長さとなっている。具体的には、突状部154、156の先端が、側面部20の外側の面よりも左側面側に若干突出する長さとなっている(つまり、突状部154、156の先端が、左右方向において側面部20の外側の面よりも左側面側となっている)。なお、上面部150の撓み具合によっては、突状部154、156の内側の面の一部のみが側面部20の上辺に接し、突状部154、156の内側の面における他の部分は側面部20の上辺の上方に位置する場合もあり、また、上面部150の撓み具合によっては、副体部101を閉状態で静置した場合には、突状部154、156が側面部20の上辺に接触せずに側面部20の上辺の上方に位置する場合もあるが(この場合でも、上方から上面部150を押さえることにより、突状部154、156が側面部20の上辺に接触する)、いずれにしても突状部154、156が側面部20の上辺の上側にある。つまり、突状部154、156の内側の面が側面部20の上辺の上側にあるためには、突状部154、156の先端が、左右方向において側面部20の内側の面よりも左側面側(つまり、外側)であればよい。突状部154と突状部156は、同大同形状に形成されている。なお、図5において、図5に示す突状部154、156の代わりに、図26に示す突状部153A、154、156を設けてもよい。 Both the protruding portion 154 and the protruding portion 156 are formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape that becomes narrower (that is, the length in the front-rear direction becomes shorter) toward the tip side, and from the base end of the protruding portion 154 and 156. The length to the tip is the protruding portion 154 when the sub-body portion 101 is closed (that is, the upper surface portion 150 covers the upper surface of the main body portion 3 in the closed state of the sub-body portion 101). The length of the inner surface of 156 (that is, the lower surface of the protruding portions 154 and 156 when the upper surface portion 150 covers the upper surface of the main body portion 3) is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 20 and is in contact with the upper side. It has become. Specifically, the tips of the protruding portions 154 and 156 have a length slightly protruding toward the left side surface from the outer surface of the side surface portion 20 (that is, the tips of the protruding portions 154 and 156 are left and right. In the direction, it is on the left side side of the outer side surface of the side surface portion 20). Depending on the degree of bending of the upper surface portion 150, only a part of the inner surface of the protruding portions 154 and 156 is in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 20, and the other portion of the inner surface of the protruding portions 154 and 156 is the side surface. It may be located above the upper side of the portion 20, and depending on the degree of bending of the upper surface portion 150, when the accessory portion 101 is allowed to stand in the closed state, the protruding portions 154 and 156 are located on the side surface portion 20. It may be located above the upper side of the side surface portion 20 without touching the upper side (even in this case, by pressing the upper surface portion 150 from above, the protruding portions 154 and 156 come into contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 20. ), In any case, the protruding portions 154 and 156 are on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 20. That is, in order for the inner surface of the protruding portions 154 and 156 to be on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 20, the tip of the protruding portions 154 and 156 is the left side surface of the inner surface of the side surface portion 20 in the left-right direction. It may be on the side (that is, the outside). The protruding portion 154 and the protruding portion 156 are formed in the same shape. In addition, in FIG. 5, instead of the protruding portions 154 and 156 shown in FIG. 5, the protruding portions 153A, 154 and 156 shown in FIG. 26 may be provided.

また、突状部158は、本体部152の右側面側の辺部に沿って右側面側に突出して形成され、突状部158は、前後方向に細長の台形形状を呈し、先端側にいくほど幅狭となる台形形状に形成されている。つまり、突状部158は、本体部152の右側面側の辺部152aの背面側の端部から連設され、本体部152の右側面側の辺部152aに対して鈍角をなす辺部158aと、辺部158aの端部から連設され略円弧状を呈する辺部158bと、辺部158bの端部から連設され、折れ線C13−1〜C13−3と平行な直線状の辺部158cと、辺部158cの端部から連設され略円弧状を呈する辺部158dと、辺部158dの端部と本体部152の右側面側の辺部152bの正面側の端部間に形成された略円弧状の辺部158eとを有している。辺部152aと辺部152bは同一直線上に形成され、本体部152と突状部158の境界は、辺部152aや辺部152bの延長線(辺部152aの辺部152b側の端部と辺部152bの辺部152a側の端部を結ぶ直線としてもよい)となる。突状部158の基端から先端までの長さは、副体部101を閉状態にした際(つまり、副体部101の閉状態において、上面部150は、本体部3の上面をカバーしている)、突状部158の内側の面(つまり、上面部150が本体部3の上面をカバーした状態では、突状部158の下面)が側面部30の上辺の上側にあって該上辺に接する長さとなっている。具体的には、突状部158の先端が、側面部30の外側の面よりも右側面側に若干突出する長さとなっている(つまり、突状部158の先端が、左右方向において側面部30の外側の面よりも右側面側となっている)。なお、上面部150の撓み具合によっては、突状部158の内側の面の一部のみが側面部30の上辺に接し、突状部158の内側の面における他の部分は側面部30の上辺の上方に位置する場合もあり、また、上面部150の撓み具合によっては、副体部101を閉状態で静置した場合には、突状部158が側面部30の上辺に接触せずに側面部30の上辺の上方に位置する場合もあるが(この場合でも、上方から上面部150を押さえることにより、突状部158が側面部30の上辺に接触する)、いずれにしても突状部158が側面部30の上辺の上側にある。つまり、突状部158の内側の面が側面部30の上辺の上側にあるためには、突状部158の先端が、左右方向において側面部30の内側の面よりも右側面側(つまり、外側)であればよい。 Further, the protruding portion 158 is formed so as to project toward the right side surface along the side portion on the right side surface side of the main body portion 152, and the protruding portion 158 exhibits an elongated trapezoidal shape in the front-rear direction and goes to the tip side. It is formed in a trapezoidal shape that becomes narrower. That is, the protruding portion 158 is continuously provided from the end portion on the back surface side of the side portion 152a on the right side surface side of the main body portion 152, and the side portion 158a forming an blunt angle with respect to the side portion 152a on the right side surface side of the main body portion 152. And the side portion 158b which is continuously connected from the end portion of the side portion 158a and has a substantially arc shape, and the linear side portion 158c which is continuously connected from the end portion of the side portion 158b and is parallel to the bending lines C13-1 to C13-3. It is formed between the side portion 158d which is connected from the end portion of the side portion 158c and has a substantially arc shape, and the end portion of the side portion 158d and the front end portion of the side portion 152b on the right side surface side of the main body portion 152. It has a side portion 158e having a substantially arc shape. The side portion 152a and the side portion 152b are formed on the same straight line, and the boundary between the main body portion 152 and the protruding portion 158 is an extension line of the side portion 152a and the side portion 152b (the end portion of the side portion 152a on the side portion 152b side). It may be a straight line connecting the ends of the side portion 152b on the side portion 152a side). The length from the base end to the tip of the protruding portion 158 is such that the upper surface portion 150 covers the upper surface of the main body portion 3 when the sub-body portion 101 is closed (that is, in the closed state of the sub-body portion 101). The inner surface of the protruding portion 158 (that is, the lower surface of the protruding portion 158 when the upper surface portion 150 covers the upper surface of the main body portion 3) is above the upper side of the side surface portion 30 and the upper side thereof. It is the length that touches. Specifically, the tip of the protruding portion 158 has a length slightly protruding toward the right side surface from the outer surface of the side surface portion 30 (that is, the tip of the protruding portion 158 is a side surface portion in the left-right direction. It is on the right side of the outer side of 30). Depending on the degree of bending of the upper surface portion 150, only a part of the inner surface of the protruding portion 158 is in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 30, and the other portion of the inner surface of the protruding portion 158 is the upper side of the side surface portion 30. Depending on the degree of bending of the upper surface portion 150, the protruding portion 158 does not come into contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 30 when the auxiliary body portion 101 is allowed to stand in the closed state. Although it may be located above the upper side of the side surface portion 30 (even in this case, by pressing the upper surface portion 150 from above, the protruding portion 158 comes into contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 30), but in any case, the protruding portion is formed. The portion 158 is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 30. That is, in order for the inner surface of the protruding portion 158 to be on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 30, the tip of the protruding portion 158 is on the right side surface side (that is, on the right side side of the inner surface of the side surface portion 30) in the left-right direction. It may be outside).

また、突状部158は、本体部152の右側面側の辺部の正面側の端部近傍から背面側の端部近傍にまで形成されている。このように、突状部154、156、158が設けられていることにより、副体部101が閉状態において、上面部150に対して上方から力が加わっても、突状部154、156、158により側面部20と側面部30間に上面部150を支えるので、上面部150が本体部3の収納空間内に沈み込むことがない。また、突状部158は、本体部152の右側面側の辺部の正面側の端部近傍から背面側の端部近傍にまで形成されているので、副体部101を閉状態にした際に、側面部30の上辺の内側には上方に開口した隙間が形成されず、ゴミや埃が入るのを防止することができる。なお、突状部158は、本体部152の右側面側の辺部の正面側の端部近傍から背面側の端部近傍にまで形成されているとしたが、「正面側の端部近傍」の代わりに「正面側の端部」としてもよく、「背面側の端部近傍」の代わりに「背面側の端部」としてもよい。 Further, the protruding portion 158 is formed from the vicinity of the front end portion of the side portion on the right side surface side of the main body portion 152 to the vicinity of the back surface side end portion. As described above, by providing the protruding portions 154, 156, and 158, even if a force is applied to the upper surface portion 150 from above in the closed state of the accessory portion 101, the protruding portions 154 and 156, Since the upper surface portion 150 is supported between the side surface portion 20 and the side surface portion 30 by the 158, the upper surface portion 150 does not sink into the storage space of the main body portion 3. Further, since the protruding portion 158 is formed from the vicinity of the front end portion of the side portion on the right side surface side of the main body portion 152 to the vicinity of the rear end side end portion, when the sub-body portion 101 is closed. In addition, a gap opened upward is not formed inside the upper side of the side surface portion 30, and it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering. It is said that the protruding portion 158 is formed from the vicinity of the front end of the right side side of the main body 152 to the vicinity of the back end, but "near the front end". It may be "the end on the front side" instead of "the end on the back side", and it may be "the end on the back side" instead of "near the end on the back side".

なお、突状部158は、「上面部の特定辺部側とは反対側の辺部に沿った端部領域」に当たる。 The protruding portion 158 corresponds to "an end region along a side portion opposite to the specific side portion side of the upper surface portion".

また、フラップ160は、上面部150(具体的には、上面部150の本体部152)の左側面側の辺部(特定辺部)から折れ線C13−1、C13−2、C13−3を介して連設され、略台形形状に形成されている。すなわち、フラップ160は、本体部152の左側面側の辺部152cの背面側の端部から連設された略円弧状の辺部160aと、辺部160aの端部から連設された略円弧状の辺部160bと、辺部160bの端部から連設された直線状の辺部160cと、辺部160cの端部から連設された略円弧状の辺部160dと、辺部160dの端部から連設され、本体部152の左側面側の辺部152dの正面側の端部まで形成された辺部160eとを有している。フラップ160の正面側の端部(つまり、折れ線C13−1の正面側の端部)は、本体部152の左側面側の辺部における正面側の端部近傍(端部としてもよい)であり、フラップ160の背面側の端部(つまり、折れ線C13−3の背面側の端部)は、本体部152の左側面側の辺部における背面側の端部近傍(端部としてもよい)となっている。辺部160bは、辺部160aと辺部160cがなす角部を円弧状に面取りしており、辺部160dは、辺部160eと辺部160cがなす角部を円弧状に面取りしている。辺部160bの略円弧の径と辺部160dの略円弧の径は略同一であり、辺部160aの略円弧の径は、辺部160bの略円弧の径よりも大きく形成されている。辺部152c、152dと折れ線C13−1、C13−2、C13−3は同一直線上に形成されている。 Further, the flap 160 is provided from the side portion (specific side portion) on the left side surface side of the upper surface portion 150 (specifically, the main body portion 152 of the upper surface portion 150) via the polygonal lines C13-1, C13-2, and C13-3. It is connected in a row and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape. That is, the flap 160 has a substantially arcuate side portion 160a connected from the end portion on the back surface side of the side portion 152c on the left side surface side of the main body portion 152, and a substantially circular circle connected from the end portion of the side portion 160a. An arc-shaped side portion 160b, a linear side portion 160c continuously connected from the end portion of the side portion 160b, a substantially arc-shaped side portion 160d continuously connected from the end portion of the side portion 160c, and a side portion 160d. It has a side portion 160e that is continuously provided from the end portion and is formed up to the front end portion of the side portion 152d on the left side surface side of the main body portion 152. The front end of the flap 160 (that is, the front end of the polygonal line C13-1) is near the front end (may be the end) of the left side side of the main body 152. , The back end of the flap 160 (that is, the back end of the polygonal line C13-3) is near the back end (may be the end) of the left side side of the main body 152. It has become. The side portion 160b chamfers the corner portion formed by the side portion 160a and the side portion 160c in an arc shape, and the side portion 160d chamfers the corner portion formed by the side portion 160e and the side portion 160c in an arc shape. The diameter of the substantially arc of the side portion 160b and the diameter of the substantially arc of the side portion 160d are substantially the same, and the diameter of the substantially arc of the side portion 160a is formed to be larger than the diameter of the substantially arc of the side portion 160b. The side portions 152c and 152d and the polygonal lines C13-1, C13-2 and C13-3 are formed on the same straight line.

また、辺部160aは折れ線C13−1に対して傾斜して形成され、具体的には、辺部160aの辺部152c側の端部における接線と折れ線C13−1間の角度は、90度よりも小さく形成され、辺部160eは折れ線C13−3に対して傾斜して形成され、具体的には、辺部160eと折れ線C13−3間の角度は、90度よりも小さく形成されている。つまり、辺部160aと辺部160e間の距離がフラップ160の先端側に行くほど短くなるように、テーパ状に形成されている。このように、辺部160a、160eがテーパ状に形成されて、フラップ160を先細りの形状とすることにより、フラップ160を側面部20の内側に差し込むのを容易としている。特に、辺部160aは略円弧状に形成されているので、フラップ160を差し込む際に正面部10の縦方向部14と干渉することがない。また、フラップ160の前後方向の最大幅(フラップ160側の端部における長さ)は、側面部20の内側に差し込むことができるように、側面部20、30の前後方向の幅よりも若干小さく形成され、また、フラップ160の基端から先端までの長さ(折れ線C13と辺部160c間の長さ)は、側面部20の上下方向の長さL20よりも短く形成され、具体的には、長さL20の略半分の長さとなっている。 Further, the side portion 160a is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the polygonal line C13-1, and specifically, the angle between the tangent line and the polygonal line C13-1 at the end portion of the side portion 160a on the side portion 152c side is 90 degrees or more. The side portion 160e is formed so as to be inclined with respect to the polygonal line C13-3, and specifically, the angle between the side portion 160e and the polygonal line C13-3 is formed to be smaller than 90 degrees. That is, it is formed in a tapered shape so that the distance between the side portion 160a and the side portion 160e becomes shorter toward the tip end side of the flap 160. As described above, the side portions 160a and 160e are formed in a tapered shape, and the flap 160 has a tapered shape, so that the flap 160 can be easily inserted into the side surface portion 20. In particular, since the side portion 160a is formed in a substantially arc shape, it does not interfere with the vertical portion 14 of the front portion 10 when the flap 160 is inserted. Further, the maximum width of the flap 160 in the front-rear direction (the length at the end portion on the flap 160 side) is slightly smaller than the width of the side surface portions 20 and 30 in the front-rear direction so that the flap 160 can be inserted inside the side surface portion 20. The flap 160 is formed, and the length from the base end to the tip end (the length between the polygonal line C13 and the side portion 160c) is formed shorter than the vertical length L20 of the side surface portion 20, specifically. , It is about half the length of the length L20.

上面部150の左側面側においては、フラップ160が連設されているとともに、フラップ160が連設されていない箇所には、突状部154、156が設けられているので、副体部101を閉状態にした際には、側面部20の上辺の内側には上方に開口した隙間が形成されず、ゴミや埃が入るのを防止することができる。 On the left side surface side of the upper surface portion 150, the flaps 160 are continuously provided, and the protruding portions 154 and 156 are provided in the places where the flaps 160 are not continuously provided. When the side surface portion 20 is in the closed state, a gap opened upward is not formed inside the upper side of the side surface portion 20, and it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering.

なお、副体部101を閉状態にした際には、正面部110が正面部10の内側に正面部10の内側の面に沿って配置され、フラップ160が、側面部20の内側に側面部20の内側の面に沿って配置され、上面部150は、本体部3の上面をカバーした状態となり、上面部150は、側面部20、30の上辺に沿った状態となり、底面部50(特に、スリーブ状部5の下辺により囲まれた平面(折れ線C6〜C9により囲まれた平面))に対して平行(略平行としてもよい)となる。また、副体部101を閉状態にした際には、上面部150は、背面部140に対して直角(略直角としてもよい)となり、正面部110とフラップ160は、上面部150に対して直角(略直角としてもよい)となる。ここで、側面部20は、「側面部20と側面部30の2つの側面部における特定辺部に対応する側面部」に当たる。 When the sub-body portion 101 is closed, the front portion 110 is arranged inside the front portion 10 along the inner surface of the front portion 10, and the flap 160 is located inside the side surface portion 20 as a side surface portion. Arranged along the inner surface of 20, the upper surface portion 150 is in a state of covering the upper surface of the main body portion 3, and the upper surface portion 150 is in a state of being along the upper side of the side surface portions 20 and 30, and the bottom surface portion 50 (particularly). , It is parallel (may be substantially parallel) to the plane surrounded by the lower side of the sleeve-shaped portion 5 (the plane surrounded by the polygonal lines C6 to C9). Further, when the sub-body portion 101 is closed, the upper surface portion 150 is at a right angle to the back surface portion 140 (may be a substantially right angle), and the front surface portion 110 and the flap 160 are perpendicular to the upper surface portion 150. It becomes a right angle (may be a substantially right angle). Here, the side surface portion 20 corresponds to "a side surface portion corresponding to a specific side portion in the two side surface portions of the side surface portion 20 and the side surface portion 30".

また、フラップ160は、上面部150の左側面側からは連設されているものの、上面部150の右側面側には連設されていないが、これは、包装箱1を折り畳んだ状態では、図9に示すようになり、糊代部49が側面部30に対して折曲しない状態となるが、仮に、フラップが上面部150の右側面側にも設けられていると、包装箱1を折り畳んだ状態で、フラップが上面部150の右側面側から突出してしまって(つまり、本体部3の左右方向の幅の外側に突出してしまう)、折り畳んだ状態でのスペースを余分に必要としてしまうことから、上面部150の右側面側にフラップを設けていない。なお、仮に上面部150の右側面側にフラップを設けた場合に、包装箱1の折畳み状態で、フラップを上面部に対して折り返すことも考えられるが、ブランクの復元力によりフラップが上面部150に対して折り返した状態から右側面側に開いてしまうため、現実的ではない。 Further, although the flap 160 is connected from the left side surface side of the upper surface portion 150, it is not connected to the right side surface side of the upper surface portion 150, but this is in the state where the packaging box 1 is folded. As shown in FIG. 9, the glue margin portion 49 is not bent with respect to the side surface portion 30, but if the flap is also provided on the right side surface side of the upper surface portion 150, the packaging box 1 is provided. In the folded state, the flap protrudes from the right side of the upper surface portion 150 (that is, protrudes to the outside of the width in the left-right direction of the main body portion 3), which requires extra space in the folded state. Therefore, the flap is not provided on the right side surface side of the upper surface portion 150. If the flap is provided on the right side of the upper surface portion 150, it is conceivable that the flap is folded back with respect to the upper surface portion in the folded state of the packaging box 1, but the flap is attached to the upper surface portion 150 due to the restoring force of the blank. It is not realistic because it opens to the right side from the folded state.

なお、本体部3と副体部101は、分離部44の箇所で互いに接着されている。つまり、分離部44の外側の面と背面部140の内側の面とが接着剤その他の接着手段により接着されることにより、包装箱1が全体に一体に形成される。つまり、分離部44の外側の面の全部又は一部の領域と背面部140の内側の面の一部の領域の間には接着剤層(図示せず)が設けられている。該接着剤層の接着力は、分離部44の内側の面に手を係止した状態で、分離部44を斜め上方に引き上げて切目線K44を破断するので、任意ではあるが、背面部140を外側に引っ張った場合に、切目線K44が破れて分離部44が本体部3から分離し、分離部44が、背面部140に接着した状態で背面部140に従動するような接着力とするのが好ましい。 The main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101 are adhered to each other at the separation portion 44. That is, the outer surface of the separation portion 44 and the inner surface of the back surface portion 140 are adhered to each other by an adhesive or other adhesive means, so that the packaging box 1 is integrally formed as a whole. That is, an adhesive layer (not shown) is provided between all or a part of the outer surface of the separation portion 44 and a part of the inner surface of the back surface portion 140. The adhesive force of the adhesive layer is optional because the separation portion 44 is pulled diagonally upward to break the cut line K44 in a state where the hand is locked to the inner surface of the separation portion 44, but the back surface portion 140 Is pulled outward, the cut line K44 is torn and the separation portion 44 is separated from the main body portion 3, and the separation portion 44 has an adhesive force that follows the back surface portion 140 in a state of being adhered to the back surface portion 140. Is preferable.

なお、本体部3及び副体部101において、各折れ線の箇所には、予め罫線が形成されている。特に、折れ線C1、C2、C3、C4、C6、C7、C8、C9においては、本体部3の内側の面から押圧した押罫であり、折れ線C11、C12、C13−1、C13−2、C13−3においては、副体部101の内側の面から押圧した押罫となっている。底面部50における折れ線70−1、80−1は、上面側から見て山折りとなるので、外側の面から押圧した押罫とするのが好ましい。 In the main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101, a ruled line is formed in advance at each polygonal line. In particular, in the broken lines C1, C2, C3, C4, C6, C7, C8, and C9, the ruled lines are pressed from the inner surface of the main body 3, and the broken lines C11, C12, C13-1, C13-2, and C13. In -3, it is a ruled line pressed from the inner surface of the sub-body portion 101. Since the polygonal lines 70-1 and 80-1 on the bottom surface portion 50 are mountain-folded when viewed from the upper surface side, it is preferable to use a ruled line pressed from the outer surface.

また、本体部3と副体部101が接着された状態では、背面部40の上辺40Ta、40Tb、40Tcと折れ線C12とが高さ方向に略一致(一致としてもよい)した状態となっており、厳密には、折れ線C12が上辺40Ta、40Tb、40Tcよりも若干上側となっている。これにより、上面部150により本体部3の上面を閉じた際に、突状部154、156が側面部20の上辺に接するとともに突状部158が側面部30の上辺に接し、上面部150と側面部20、30の上辺との間の隙間が形成されるのを防止することができる。 Further, in the state where the main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101 are adhered to each other, the upper sides 40Ta, 40Tb, 40Tc of the back surface portion 40 and the polygonal line C12 are substantially aligned (may be matched) in the height direction. Strictly speaking, the polygonal line C12 is slightly above the upper sides 40Ta, 40Tb, and 40Tc. As a result, when the upper surface of the main body 3 is closed by the upper surface portion 150, the protruding portions 154 and 156 are in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 20 and the protruding portion 158 is in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 30. It is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the upper sides of the side surface portions 20 and 30.

また、本体部3と副体部101が接着された状態では、背面部140の下端と背面部40の下端が一致(略一致としてもよい)している。 Further, in a state where the main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101 are adhered to each other, the lower end of the back surface portion 140 and the lower end of the back surface portion 40 are aligned (may be substantially the same).

上記構成の包装箱1の製造工程について説明する。まず、展開状態の本体部3と副体部101とを製造する。 The manufacturing process of the packaging box 1 having the above configuration will be described. First, the main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101 in the expanded state are manufactured.

次に、副体部101の内側の面に本体部3の外側の面を接着させる(第1接着工程)。つまり、展開状態の副体部101の内側の面を上側にして、背面部140における分離部44との接着領域に接着剤を塗布して、展開状態の本体部3を図6に示すように重ねる。これにより、分離部44と背面部140が接着される(第1接着工程)。その際、背面部40の下辺と背面部140の下辺とが一致する(略一致するとしてもよい)ようにする。なお、分離部44の外側の面の領域に接着剤を塗布して、分離部44を背面部140に接着させてもよい。 Next, the outer surface of the main body portion 3 is adhered to the inner surface of the sub-body portion 101 (first bonding step). That is, with the inner surface of the sub-body portion 101 in the unfolded state facing upward, the adhesive is applied to the adhesive region with the separated portion 44 on the back surface portion 140, and the main body portion 3 in the unfolded state is shown in FIG. Stack. As a result, the separated portion 44 and the back surface portion 140 are bonded (first bonding step). At that time, the lower side of the back surface portion 40 and the lower side of the back surface portion 140 are made to match (may be substantially the same). An adhesive may be applied to the region of the outer surface of the separation portion 44 to adhere the separation portion 44 to the back surface portion 140.

次に、本体部3の底面部50を構成する各部をスリーブ状部5に対して内側に折り返し、さらに、第2片部70の先端部74を本体部72に対して外側に折り返すとともに、第3片部80の先端部84を本体部82に対して外側に折り返して、図7に示す状態とする(折り返し工程)。つまり、第1片部60を折れ線C6を介して正面部10側に折り返し、第2片部70を折れ線C7を介して側面部20側に折り返し、第3片部80を折れ線C9を介して側面部30側に折り返し、第4片部90を折れ線C8−1、C8−2を介して背面部40側に折り返し、さらに、先端部74を本体部72に対して折り返すとともに、先端部84を本体部82に対して折り返して、図7に示す状態とする。 Next, each portion constituting the bottom surface portion 50 of the main body portion 3 is folded inward with respect to the sleeve-shaped portion 5, and further, the tip portion 74 of the second piece portion 70 is folded outward with respect to the main body portion 72, and the second piece is folded. 3 The tip portion 84 of the piece portion 80 is folded outward with respect to the main body portion 82 to obtain the state shown in FIG. 7 (folding step). That is, the first piece portion 60 is folded back to the front portion 10 side via the polygonal line C6, the second piece portion 70 is folded back to the side surface portion 20 side via the polygonal line C7, and the third piece portion 80 is folded back to the side surface portion via the polygonal line C9. The fourth piece 90 is folded back to the back portion 40 side via the polygonal lines C8-1 and C8-2, the tip portion 74 is folded back to the main body portion 72, and the tip portion 84 is folded back to the main body. It is folded back with respect to the portion 82 so as to be in the state shown in FIG.

次に、先端部74の領域に接着剤を塗布して(接着剤塗布工程)、正面部10を折れ線C1を介して側面部20の側に内側に折り返す(第2折り返し工程)ことにより(図8参照)、先端部74が第1片部60に接着される(第2接着工程)。なお、先端部74の代わりに、第1片部60における先端部74との接着領域に接着剤を塗布してもよい。 Next, an adhesive is applied to the region of the tip portion 74 (adhesive application step), and the front portion 10 is folded inward toward the side surface portion 20 via the folding line C1 (second folding step) (FIG. 8), the tip portion 74 is bonded to the first piece portion 60 (second bonding step). Instead of the tip portion 74, an adhesive may be applied to the adhesive region of the first piece portion 60 with the tip portion 74.

次に、先端部84の領域と、糊代部49の領域に接着剤を塗布して(接着剤塗布工程)、側面部30を折れ線C3を介して背面部40の側に内側に折り返すことにより、図9に示す状態とする。すると、先端部84と第4片部90が接着され、糊代部49が正面部10の外側の面に接着される(第3接着工程)。なお、糊代部49の代わりに、正面部10における糊代部49との接着領域に接着剤を塗布してもよく、また、先端部84の代わりに、第4片部90における先端部84との接着領域に接着剤を塗布してもよい。以上のようにして、包装箱1が製造される。なお、上記の製造は、組立て装置により自動で製造される。以上のように、第1接着工程〜第3接着工程により包装箱1を製造できるので、容易に包装箱1を製造することができる。なお、糊代部49を正面部10の内側の面に接着する場合には、先端部84に接着剤を塗布した状態で側面部30を折り返し、その後に、先端部74と糊代部49に接着剤を塗布した状態で正面部10を折り返すことになる。 Next, an adhesive is applied to the region of the tip portion 84 and the region of the glue margin portion 49 (adhesive application step), and the side surface portion 30 is folded inward toward the back surface portion 40 via the polygonal line C3. , The state shown in FIG. Then, the tip portion 84 and the fourth piece portion 90 are bonded, and the glue margin portion 49 is bonded to the outer surface of the front surface portion 10 (third bonding step). Instead of the glue margin portion 49, an adhesive may be applied to the adhesive region of the front surface portion 10 with the glue margin portion 49, and instead of the tip portion 84, the tip portion 84 of the fourth piece portion 90 may be applied. An adhesive may be applied to the area to be adhered to. As described above, the packaging box 1 is manufactured. The above manufacturing is automatically manufactured by the assembly device. As described above, since the packaging box 1 can be manufactured by the first bonding step to the third bonding step, the packaging box 1 can be easily manufactured. When the glue margin portion 49 is adhered to the inner surface of the front surface portion 10, the side surface portion 30 is folded back with the adhesive applied to the tip portion 84, and then the tip portion 74 and the glue margin portion 49 are attached. The front portion 10 is folded back with the adhesive applied.

なお、本体部3と副体部101とを接着した際に、本体部3と副体部101の相対位置が正しいか否かは、位置合わせ確認用の切込みにより確認することができる。すなわち、切込み40fと切込みK140bの左右方向の位置が一致し、切込み42fと切込みK142bの左右方向の位置が一致しているか否かにより左右方向の位置を確認でき、また、切欠部K40の辺部40cと切込みK140aの上下方向の位置が一致し、切込みK42の辺部42cと切込みK142aの上下方向の位置が一致しているか否かにより上下方向の位置が確認できる。 When the main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101 are adhered to each other, whether or not the relative positions of the main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101 are correct can be confirmed by a notch for confirming the alignment. That is, the position in the left-right direction can be confirmed by checking whether the positions of the notch 40f and the notch K140b in the left-right direction match and the positions of the notch 42f and the notch K142b in the left-right direction match. The vertical position can be confirmed by checking whether the vertical positions of the cut K140a and 40c match, and the vertical positions of the side portion 42c of the cut K42 and the cut K142a match.

なお、上記の製造工程において、第3片部80を側面部30側に折り返し、第4片部90を背面部40側に折り返し、さらに、先端部84を本体部82に対して折り返す工程は、正面部10を側面部20の側に折り返して、先端部74を第1片部60に接着した後で、先端部84の領域と、糊代部49の領域に接着剤を塗布する前に行ってもよい。その場合、上記折返し工程では、第1片部60と第2片部70を折り返して、先端部74を折り返し、その後、先端部74に接着剤を塗布することになる。 In the above manufacturing process, the step of folding the third piece portion 80 toward the side surface portion 30, folding the fourth piece portion 90 toward the back surface portion 40, and further folding the tip portion 84 with respect to the main body portion 82 is This is performed after the front portion 10 is folded back toward the side surface portion 20 and the tip portion 74 is adhered to the first piece portion 60, and then before the adhesive is applied to the region of the tip portion 84 and the region of the glue margin portion 49. You may. In that case, in the folding step, the first piece 60 and the second piece 70 are folded back, the tip portion 74 is folded back, and then the adhesive is applied to the tip portion 74.

また、先端部74への接着剤の塗布は、第2片部70を折り返し先端部74を折り返した状態で行うとしたが、第2片部70を側面部20に対して折り返す前の状態で、先端部74に接着剤を塗布した後に、第2片部70を折り返しながら先端部74を折り返すようにしてもよい。 Further, the adhesive is applied to the tip portion 74 in a state where the second piece portion 70 is folded back and the tip portion 74 is folded back, but the second piece portion 70 is in a state before being folded back with respect to the side surface portion 20. After applying the adhesive to the tip portion 74, the tip portion 74 may be folded back while folding back the second piece portion 70.

また、先端部84への接着剤の塗布は、第3片部80を折り返し先端部84を折り返した状態で行うとしたが、第3片部80を側面部30に対して折り返す前の状態で、先端部84に接着剤を塗布した後に、第3片部80を折り返しながら先端部84を折り返すようにしてもよい。なお、先端部84への接着剤の塗布は、先端部74と第1片部60を接着した後で行ってもよい。 Further, the adhesive is applied to the tip portion 84 in a state where the third piece portion 80 is folded back and the tip portion 84 is folded back, but the third piece portion 80 is in a state before being folded back with respect to the side surface portion 30. After applying the adhesive to the tip portion 84, the tip portion 84 may be folded back while folding back the third piece portion 80. The adhesive may be applied to the tip portion 84 after the tip portion 74 and the first piece portion 60 are adhered to each other.

上記構成の包装箱1の使用方法について説明する。包装箱1を使用しない状態では、包装箱1は図9に示すように平板状に折り畳むことができるので、折り畳んで保管しておく。 A method of using the packaging box 1 having the above configuration will be described. When the packaging box 1 is not used, the packaging box 1 can be folded into a flat plate shape as shown in FIG. 9, so that the packaging box 1 is folded and stored.

次に、包装箱1を使用する際に、包装箱1を組み立てる。すなわち、本体部3における正面部10と背面部40が互いに平行になり、側面部20と側面部30が互いに平行になるようにし、底面部50をスリーブ状部5に対して直角となるように組み立てることにより、包装箱1が、図1、図2に示すように組み立てられる。 Next, when using the packaging box 1, the packaging box 1 is assembled. That is, the front surface portion 10 and the back surface portion 40 of the main body portion 3 are parallel to each other, the side surface portions 20 and the side surface portions 30 are parallel to each other, and the bottom surface portion 50 is perpendicular to the sleeve-shaped portion 5. By assembling, the packaging box 1 is assembled as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2.

そして、図10に示すように、本体部3に被収納物(商品)Gを収納する。なお、図9の状態から本体部3を組み立てた場合には、図1、図2に示すように、上面部150や正面部110は上方に伸びた状態となっていて、本体部3の上方が開口した状態になっているので、被収納物Gをそのまま本体部3の上方から収納すればよい。なお、被収納物が柔らかいものであれば、正面部10や側面部20と被収納物との間に隙間を設けなくても、正面部10や側面部20の差込みに支障はないが、被収納物Gが図10に示すような箱状等の硬いものである場合には、正面部10と被収納物との間や側面部20と被収納物との間に隙間を設けておく。 Then, as shown in FIG. 10, the stored object (product) G is stored in the main body portion 3. When the main body 3 is assembled from the state of FIG. 9, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the upper surface portion 150 and the front surface portion 110 are in a state of extending upward and above the main body portion 3. Is in an open state, the stored object G may be stored as it is from above the main body portion 3. If the stored object is soft, there is no problem in inserting the front portion 10 or the side surface portion 20 even if a gap is not provided between the front portion 10 or the side surface portion 20 and the stored object. When the stored object G is a hard object such as a box as shown in FIG. 10, a gap is provided between the front surface portion 10 and the stored object or between the side surface portion 20 and the stored object.

被収納物Gを収納したら、副体部101を閉状態にして被収納物を包装する。すなわち、上面部150を正面側に回動させるとともに、フラップ160を上面部150に対して折り曲げた状態として本体部3内に挿入し、正面部110を上面部150に対して折り曲げた状態として本体部3内に挿入して、図11、図12、図13に示す状態にする。つまり、フラップ160が側面部20の内側となるようにするとともに、正面部110が正面部10の内側となるようにして、本体部3の上面側を上面部150により閉じた状態とする。 After storing the stored object G, the accessory portion 101 is closed and the stored object is packaged. That is, the upper surface portion 150 is rotated toward the front side, the flap 160 is inserted into the main body portion 3 in a state of being bent with respect to the upper surface portion 150, and the main body is in a state of being bent with respect to the upper surface portion 150. It is inserted into the portion 3 to bring it into the state shown in FIGS. 11, 12, and 13. That is, the flap 160 is set to be inside the side surface portion 20, and the front surface portion 110 is set to be inside the front surface portion 10, so that the upper surface side of the main body portion 3 is closed by the upper surface portion 150.

なお、副体部101を閉状態にした際には、正面部110の先端(辺部110c)が底面部50(具体的には、第1片部60)の上面に接し(つまり、正面部110が正面部10と平行(略平行としてもよい)で正面部10の内側の面に沿った状態で、正面部110の先端が底面部50の上面に接する)、上面部150が本体部3の上面をカバーし、突状部154、156の下面が側面部20の上辺に接し、さらに、突状部158の下面が側面部30の上辺に接する。 When the sub-body portion 101 is closed, the tip end (side portion 110c) of the front portion 110 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 50 (specifically, the first piece portion 60) (that is, the front portion). The tip of the front portion 110 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 50 while the 110 is parallel to the front surface portion 10 (may be substantially parallel) and is along the inner surface of the front surface portion 10), and the upper surface portion 150 is the main body portion 3. The lower surface of the protruding portions 154 and 156 is in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 20, and the lower surface of the protruding portion 158 is in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 30.

以上のようにして、被収納物Gを包装箱1に包装したら、包装箱1を被収納物Gを陳列する場所に搬送する。 After the packaged object G is packaged in the packaging box 1 as described above, the packaging box 1 is transported to the place where the packaged object G is displayed.

その後、被収納物を陳列する場合には、切目線K44を破断して、副体部101を本体部3から分離して、副体部101を取り除く。 After that, when displaying the stored items, the cut line K44 is broken, the sub-body portion 101 is separated from the main body portion 3, and the sub-body portion 101 is removed.

すなわち、包装箱1の底面に設けられた開口部93に指(具体的には、親指以外の指(例えば、人差し指〜小指の4本の指))を入れて分離部44の内側の面の下端領域に指を引っ掛け(図14参照)、分離部44を外側に引っ張ることにより、切目線K44が下端から上方に向けて破断するとともに、背面部140が折れ線C12を介して回動する(図15)。さらに、背面部140を上方まで持ち上げると、図16に示す状態となる。なお、図16においては、正面部110の状態を示すために、被収納物Gを仮想線で表している。 That is, a finger (specifically, a finger other than the thumb (for example, four fingers from the index finger to the little finger)) is inserted into the opening 93 provided on the bottom surface of the packaging box 1, and the inner surface of the separation portion 44 is formed. By hooking a finger on the lower end region (see FIG. 14) and pulling the separation portion 44 outward, the cut line K44 breaks upward from the lower end, and the back surface portion 140 rotates via the break line C12 (FIG. 14). 15). Further, when the back surface portion 140 is lifted upward, the state shown in FIG. 16 is obtained. In FIG. 16, the stored object G is represented by a virtual line in order to show the state of the front portion 110.

そして、正面部110を本体部3から引き出して、副体部101(厳密には、分離部44が接着された副体部101)を取り除くことにより、図17、図18に示す状態となり、正面部10の側を陳列における正面側として、被収納物Gを陳列する。陳列された被収納物Gは、上方から視認できるとともに、切欠部K10を介して正面側から視認することができる。 Then, by pulling out the front portion 110 from the main body portion 3 and removing the sub-body portion 101 (strictly speaking, the sub-body portion 101 to which the separation portion 44 is adhered), the state shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is obtained, and the front surface is obtained. The stored object G is displayed with the side of the unit 10 as the front side in the display. The displayed object G can be visually recognized from above and also from the front side through the notch K10.

なお、切目線K44を破断する際に、親指で背面部140の外側面を押さえて背面部140をつかんだ状態として、背面部140を上方に回動させて切目線K44を破断したら、図16に示すように、背面部140を上方まで持ち上げ、背面部140を持った手で正面部110を引き出すことにより副体部101を取り除くことができるので、1つの一連の動作で切目線K44の破断と副体部101の取出しを行なうことができる。 When the cut line K44 is broken, the back surface 140 is held by the outer surface of the back portion 140 with the thumb, and the back portion 140 is rotated upward to break the cut line K44. As shown in the above, the subbody portion 101 can be removed by lifting the back portion 140 upward and pulling out the front portion 110 with the hand holding the back portion 140, so that the cut line K44 is broken by one series of operations. And the sub-body portion 101 can be taken out.

以上のように、本実施例の包装箱1によれば、切目線K44を破断して分離部44のみを分離すればよいので、副体部101(包装箱1の一部)を取り除く作業を容易に行うことができ、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行なうことができ、特に、切目線K44を破断することによる分離部44の分離と副体部101の取出しを一連の作業で行なうことができるので、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行うことができる。 As described above, according to the packaging box 1 of the present embodiment, since it is only necessary to break the cut line K44 and separate only the separation portion 44, the work of removing the accessory portion 101 (a part of the packaging box 1) is performed. It can be easily performed, and the display work of the stored items can be easily performed. In particular, the separation portion 44 is separated by breaking the cut line K44 and the sub-body portion 101 is taken out in a series of operations. Therefore, the display work of the items to be stored can be easily performed.

なお、分離部44の下端に指を係止した状態で、分離部44の下端を外側にひっぱることにより切目線K44が破断するので、切目線K44の破断を容易に行なうことができる。 Since the cut line K44 is broken by pulling the lower end of the separation portion 44 outward with the finger locked to the lower end of the separation portion 44, the cut line K44 can be easily broken.

副体部101を閉状態にした際には、正面部110の先端(辺部110c)が底面部50(具体的には、第1片部60)の上面に接し、上面部150が本体部3の上面をカバーし、突状部154、156の下面が側面部20の上辺の上側にあり、さらに、突状部158の下面が側面部30の上辺の上側にあるので、副体部101の閉状態における包装箱1の強度を高く維持することができ、例えば、上面部150に対して上から力が加わっても、上面部150が下方に沈み込むのを防止することができる。 When the sub-body portion 101 is closed, the tip end (side portion 110c) of the front surface portion 110 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 50 (specifically, the first piece portion 60), and the upper surface portion 150 is the main body portion. Since the upper surface of the protruding portion 154 is covered, the lower surface of the protruding portions 154 and 156 is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 20, and the lower surface of the protruding portion 158 is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 30, the sub-body portion 101 The strength of the packaging box 1 in the closed state can be maintained high, and for example, even if a force is applied to the upper surface portion 150 from above, the upper surface portion 150 can be prevented from sinking downward.

また、本体部3と副体部101は、展開状態において略方形状を呈するので、ブランクの面積を有効活用できる。つまり、本実施例の包装箱1の2つ分をシート状のブランクから形成する場合に、図19に示すように、領域R1の面積があればよい。 Further, since the main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101 have a substantially rectangular shape in the unfolded state, the area of the blank can be effectively utilized. That is, when two packaging boxes 1 of this embodiment are formed from sheet-shaped blanks, the area of the region R1 may be sufficient as shown in FIG.

一方、仮に、本体部3と副体部101を一体にしたものに近似した包装箱1001の2つを1つのブランクで形成しようとすると、図20に示す構成となり、領域R11の面積が必要になってしまい、図20のハッチングに示す2つの領域が無駄になってしまうことから、領域R1の面積を領域R11の面積よりも小さくできる。 On the other hand, if it is attempted to form two packaging boxes 1001 that are similar to the one in which the main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101 are integrated with one blank, the configuration shown in FIG. 20 is obtained, and the area of the region R11 is required. Since the two regions shown in the hatching in FIG. 20 are wasted, the area of the region R1 can be made smaller than the area of the region R11.

なお、図20に示す包装箱1001においては、背面部40’から切目線K40’を介して上面部150が連設されており、背面部40’には、包装箱1と異なり、分離部は設けられていない。被収納物を陳列する場合には、切目線K40’を破断して、上面部150と正面部110とフラップ160を取り除くことになる。この包装箱1001においては、背面部40’と上面部150とが切目線K40’により連設されているので、上面部150に上側から力が加わった場合に、切目線K40’が破断しやすく、本実施例の包装箱1よりも強度が弱いと言える。つまり、本実施例の包装箱1では、背面部40と背面部140が重なる構成であるにも関わらず、本体部3と副体部101がともに略方形状を呈するので、ブランクの面積を有効活用でき、さらには、上面部150の辺部に沿って切目線が存在しないので、強度を高めることができるといえる。 In the packaging box 1001 shown in FIG. 20, an upper surface portion 150 is continuously provided from the back surface portion 40'to the cut line K40', and the back surface portion 40'has a separated portion unlike the packaging box 1. Not provided. When displaying the items to be stored, the cut line K40'is broken to remove the upper surface portion 150, the front portion 110, and the flap 160. In this packaging box 1001, the back surface portion 40'and the upper surface portion 150 are connected to each other by the cut line K40', so that the cut line K40'is easily broken when a force is applied to the upper surface portion 150 from above. It can be said that the strength is weaker than that of the packaging box 1 of this embodiment. That is, in the packaging box 1 of the present embodiment, although the back surface portion 40 and the back surface portion 140 overlap each other, the main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101 both exhibit a substantially rectangular shape, so that the blank area is effective. It can be utilized, and further, since there is no cut line along the side portion of the upper surface portion 150, it can be said that the strength can be increased.

なお、上記の説明において、フラップ160は上面部150の左側面側から連設されているとしたが、副体部101を前後方向の中心面を介して左右対称の構成として、フラップ160を上面部150の右側面側から連設された構成としてもよい。その場合には、本体部3についても、前後方向の中心面を介して左右対称の構成とする。このように、左右対称の構成とする場合には、包装箱の製造に際しては、図7においては、本体部3と副体部101を左右線対称にして(つまり、表裏を逆にして)配置することになる。 In the above description, the flap 160 is connected from the left side surface side of the upper surface portion 150, but the flap 160 is provided on the upper surface with the accessory portion 101 being symmetrically configured via the central surface in the front-rear direction. It may be configured to be continuously provided from the right side of the portion 150. In that case, the main body portion 3 also has a symmetrical configuration via the central surface in the front-rear direction. In this way, in the case of a symmetrical configuration, in the case of manufacturing the packaging box, in FIG. 7, the main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101 are arranged symmetrically (that is, the front and back sides are reversed). Will be done.

また、副体部101を閉状態にした際には、正面部110の先端(辺部110c)が底面部50の上面に接するとしたが、正面部110の基端から先端までの長さを短くして、副体部101を閉状態にした際に、正面部110の先端が底面部50に接しないようにしてもよい。なお、正面部110の基端から先端までの長さを短くする場合には、正面部110の先端の辺部110cが横方向部12によりカバーされる必要があるので、副体部101を閉状態にした際に、辺部10dの上下方向の位置を辺部110cよりも上側とする。 Further, when the sub-body portion 101 is closed, the tip end (side portion 110c) of the front surface portion 110 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 50, but the length from the base end to the tip end of the front surface portion 110 is determined. It may be shortened so that the tip of the front surface portion 110 does not come into contact with the bottom surface portion 50 when the sub-body portion 101 is closed. When shortening the length from the base end to the tip end of the front surface portion 110, the side portion 110c at the tip end of the front surface portion 110 needs to be covered by the lateral portion 12, so that the sub-body portion 101 is closed. When the state is set, the vertical position of the side portion 10d is set above the side portion 110c.

また、底面部50においては、正面部10から第1片部60が連設され、側面部20から第2片部70が連設されるとしたが、組立て状態における本体部3の左右方向の長さが前後方向の長さよりも長い場合等には、正面部10から第2片部70が連設され、側面部20から第1片部10が連設される構成としてもよい。その場合でも、先端部74は、第2片部70における第1片部60側に形成され、例えば、第1片部60と第2片部70は、本体部3の展開状態において第1片部60と第2片部70間の中心線を介して左右対称となる。同様に、側面部30から第3片部80が連設され、背面部40から第4片部90が連設されるとしたが、側面部30から第4片部90が連設され、背面部40から第3片部80が連設される構成としてもよい。その場合でも、先端部84は、第3片部80における第4片部90側に形成され、例えば、第3片部80と第4片部90は、本体部3の展開状態において第3片部80と第4片部90間の中心線を介して左右対称となる。 Further, in the bottom surface portion 50, the first piece portion 60 is continuously provided from the front portion 10 and the second piece portion 70 is continuously provided from the side surface portion 20, but the main body portion 3 in the assembled state is connected in the left-right direction. When the length is longer than the length in the front-rear direction, the front portion 10 to the second piece portion 70 may be continuously provided, and the side surface portion 20 may be connected to the first piece portion 10. Even in that case, the tip portion 74 is formed on the side of the first piece portion 60 of the second piece portion 70, and for example, the first piece portion 60 and the second piece portion 70 are the first pieces in the deployed state of the main body portion 3. It becomes symmetrical via the center line between the portion 60 and the second piece portion 70. Similarly, the side surface portion 30 is connected to the third piece portion 80, and the back surface portion 40 is connected to the fourth piece portion 90. However, the side surface portion 30 to the fourth piece portion 90 are connected to the back surface. A configuration may be configured in which the third piece portion 80 is continuously provided from the portion 40. Even in that case, the tip portion 84 is formed on the side of the fourth piece portion 90 in the third piece portion 80, and for example, the third piece portion 80 and the fourth piece portion 90 are the third piece in the expanded state of the main body portion 3. It becomes symmetrical via the center line between the portion 80 and the fourth piece portion 90.

また、本体部3は、上記の構成であるとして説明したが、本体部3の代わりに図21に示す本体部3Aとしてもよい。すなわち、本体部3Aにおいては、正面部10と側面部20の構成が本体部3の場合とは異なる。 Further, although the main body portion 3 has been described as having the above configuration, the main body portion 3A shown in FIG. 21 may be used instead of the main body portion 3. That is, in the main body portion 3A, the configurations of the front surface portion 10 and the side surface portion 20 are different from those in the case of the main body portion 3.

すなわち、本体部3Aにおける正面部10は、方形状を呈し(厳密には、左右の上端の角部が略円弧状に面取りされている)、本体部3とは異なり、切欠部は設けられていない。 That is, the front portion 10 of the main body portion 3A has a square shape (strictly speaking, the corners of the upper left and right ends are chamfered in a substantially arc shape), and unlike the main body portion 3, a notch portion is provided. No.

また、側面部20は、方形状(具体的には、長方形状)を呈し、略U字状の切目線K24が形成されている。切目線K24は、側面部20の上辺から下方に向けて折れ線C2と平行に直線状に形成された切目線K24aと、切目線K24aの下端から連設され、円弧状に形成された切目線K24bと、切目線K24cの端部から連設され、折れ線C7と平行に直線状に形成された切目線K24cと、切目線K24cの正面側の端部から連設され、円弧状に形成された切目線K24dと、切目線K24dの端部から上方に向けて側面部20の上辺まで折れ線C1と平行に直線状に形成された切目線K24eとを有し、切目線K24の両側の端部は、側面部20の上辺に接している。切目線K24aと折れ線C2間の長さと切目線K24eと折れ線C1間の長さは同一であり、図21において、側面部20は、切目線K24を含めて、上下方向の中心線を介して左右対称に形成されている。この側面部20が、特定側面部に当たり、切目線K24は、「上方に開口した切欠部を特定側面部に形成するための切目線である切欠部形成用切目線」に当たる。 Further, the side surface portion 20 has a rectangular shape (specifically, a rectangular shape), and a substantially U-shaped cut line K24 is formed. The cut line K24 is formed in a straight line from the upper side of the side surface portion 20 downward in parallel with the polygonal line C2, and the cut line K24b is connected from the lower end of the cut line K24a and formed in an arc shape. And the cut line K24c which is connected from the end of the cut line K24c and is formed linearly in parallel with the polygonal line C7, and the cut which is connected from the end on the front side of the cut line K24c and formed in an arc shape. It has a line-of-sight line K24d and a line-of-sight line K24e formed linearly in parallel with the polygonal line C1 from the end portion of the line-of-sight line K24d to the upper side of the side surface portion 20. It is in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 20. The length between the cut line K24a and the polygonal line C2 and the length between the cut line K24e and the polygonal line C1 are the same. It is formed symmetrically. The side surface portion 20 corresponds to the specific side surface portion, and the cut line K24 corresponds to the “cut line for forming the cutout portion, which is a cut line for forming the notch portion opened upward on the specific side surface portion”.

切目線K24に沿った辺部と側面部20の上辺で囲まれた領域が切取り部24となり、側面部20は、切取り部24と、側面部20における切取り部24以外の領域である本体部22とを有している。つまり、切目線K24を破断することにより、切目線K24に沿った辺部と側面部20の上辺により囲まれた切取り部24が側面部20から取り除かれ、本体部22には、上方に開口した切欠部が設けられる。この切欠部を介して、陳列状態の被収納物を視認することができる。 The area surrounded by the side portion along the cut line K24 and the upper side of the side surface portion 20 is the cut portion 24, and the side surface portion 20 is the main body portion 22 which is an area other than the cut portion 24 and the cut portion 24 in the side surface portion 20. And have. That is, by breaking the cut line K24, the cut portion 24 surrounded by the side portion along the cut line K24 and the upper side of the side surface portion 20 is removed from the side surface portion 20, and the main body portion 22 is opened upward. A notch is provided. Through this notch, the stored items in the displayed state can be visually recognized.

本体部3Aにおいて、上記以外の構成は本体部3と同様であるので、詳しい説明を省略する。 Since the configuration of the main body 3A other than the above is the same as that of the main body 3, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

また、本体部3Aに接着する副体部は、図5に示す副体部101と同一の構成であり、副体部101の背面部140が背面部40の分離部44と接着される。 Further, the sub-body portion to be adhered to the main body portion 3A has the same configuration as the sub-body portion 101 shown in FIG. 5, and the back surface portion 140 of the sub-body portion 101 is adhered to the separation portion 44 of the back surface portion 40.

本体部3Aを用いた包装箱の製造方法は、包装箱1と同様であり、また、包装箱の使用方法も側面部20側を陳列における正面側として陳列を行なう以外は同様である。 The method of manufacturing the packaging box using the main body portion 3A is the same as that of the packaging box 1, and the method of using the packaging box is also the same except that the side surface portion 20 side is the front side of the display.

つまり、本体部3Aに被収納物を収納する際には、側面部20側を陳列における正面側となるように被収納物を収納し、被収納物を収納したら、包装箱1の場合と同様に、上面部150を正面側に回動させるとともに、フラップ160を上面部150に対して折り曲げた状態として本体部3A内に挿入し、正面部110を上面部150に対して折り曲げた状態として本体部3A内に挿入して、フラップ160が側面部20の内側となるようにするとともに、正面部110が正面部10の内側となるようにして、本体部3Aの上面側を上面部150により閉じた状態とする。 That is, when the items to be stored are stored in the main body 3A, the items to be stored are stored so that the side surface 20 side is the front side in the display, and when the items to be stored are stored, the same as in the case of the packaging box 1. In addition, the upper surface portion 150 is rotated toward the front side, and the flap 160 is inserted into the main body portion 3A in a state of being bent with respect to the upper surface portion 150, and the front surface portion 110 is in a state of being bent with respect to the upper surface portion 150. Inserted into the portion 3A so that the flap 160 is inside the side surface portion 20 and the front surface portion 110 is inside the front surface portion 10, and the upper surface side of the main body portion 3A is closed by the upper surface portion 150. It is in a state of being.

被収納物を陳列する際には、包装箱1の場合と同様に、切目線K44を破断して副体部101を本体部3Aから分離し、副体部101(分離部44が接着された副体部101)を取り除く。その後、切目線K24を破断して、切取り部24を側面部20から分離することにより、本体部20に切欠部が設けられた構成となる。そして、側面部20側(つまり、本体部22側)を陳列における正面側として、被収納物を陳列する。 When displaying the items to be stored, as in the case of the packaging box 1, the cut line K44 was broken to separate the sub-body portion 101 from the main body portion 3A, and the sub-body portion 101 (separation portion 44 was adhered). Remove the accessory part 101). After that, the cut line K24 is broken and the cut portion 24 is separated from the side surface portion 20, so that the main body portion 20 is provided with a notch portion. Then, the items to be stored are displayed with the side surface portion 20 side (that is, the main body portion 22 side) as the front side in the display.

このように、側面部20側を陳列における正面側とすることができるので、側面部20の横方向の長さが正面部10の横方向の長さよりも長い場合に、陳列における正面側における横幅を大きくして陳列することができる。つまり、本体部3や本体部3Aにおいては、底面部50ワンタッチ底による構成からすると、第2片部70の側面部20の下辺に沿った長さが、第1片部60の側面部10の下辺に沿った長さよりも長く形成される場合があり、そうすると、側面部20の横幅が正面部10の横幅よりも長くなるので、側面部20の側を陳列における正面側とすることにより、正面部10の側を陳列における正面側とするよりも陳列における正面側の横幅を長くすることができ、例えば、収納される被収納物の横幅が長い場合に対応することができる。すなわち、底面部がワンタッチ底により構成される場合に、第2片部70や第3片部80のように先端部が本体部に対して折曲する構成の片部から連設された部材(スリーブ状部を構成する部材)の下辺に沿った長さが、該片部に隣接する片部の該下辺に沿った長さよりも長い場合があるので、陳列における正面側の横幅を長くしたい場合に、図21に示されるように、側面部20に切目線K24を形成する方法を用いることができる。つまり、図21に示す構成においては、先端部が本体部に対して折曲する構成の片部から連設された部材(スリーブ状部を構成する部材)である側面部20、30を陳列における正面側と背面側にすることができる。また、図21に示す構成は、図4において、正面部10から第2片部70が連設され、側面部20から第1片部60が連設され、側面部30から第4片部90が連設され、背面部40から第3片部80が連設された構成とすることが製造装置の影響でできない場合に、陳列における正面側の横幅を長くするのに有効である。 In this way, since the side surface portion 20 side can be the front side in the display, when the lateral length of the side surface portion 20 is longer than the lateral length of the front surface portion 10, the lateral width on the front side in the display Can be enlarged and displayed. That is, in the main body portion 3 and the main body portion 3A, the length along the lower side of the side surface portion 20 of the second piece portion 70 is the length of the side surface portion 10 of the first piece portion 60 in view of the configuration of the bottom surface portion 50 one-touch bottom. It may be formed longer than the length along the lower side, and then the width of the side surface portion 20 becomes longer than the width of the front surface portion 10. Therefore, by setting the side of the side surface portion 20 as the front side in the display, the front surface portion 20 is formed. The width of the front side of the display can be made longer than the side of the portion 10 as the front side of the display, and for example, it can be used when the width of the stored object is long. That is, when the bottom surface portion is composed of a one-touch bottom, a member continuously provided from one portion having a structure in which the tip portion is bent with respect to the main body portion, such as the second piece portion 70 and the third piece portion 80. The length along the lower side of the sleeve-shaped part) may be longer than the length along the lower side of the piece adjacent to the piece, so when you want to increase the width of the front side in the display. In addition, as shown in FIG. 21, a method of forming a cut line K24 on the side surface portion 20 can be used. That is, in the configuration shown in FIG. 21, the side surface portions 20 and 30 which are members (members constituting the sleeve-shaped portion) connected continuously from one portion having a configuration in which the tip portion is bent with respect to the main body portion are displayed. It can be on the front side and the back side. Further, in the configuration shown in FIG. 21, in FIG. 4, the front portion 10 to the second piece portion 70 are continuously connected, the side surface portion 20 to the first piece portion 60 are continuously provided, and the side surface portion 30 to the fourth piece portion 90 are connected. It is effective to increase the width of the front side in the display when the configuration is such that the back surface portion 40 and the third piece portion 80 are continuously provided and the third piece portion 80 cannot be connected due to the influence of the manufacturing apparatus.

なお、図21の例では、側面部20に切目線K24を形成するとしたが、側面部20に切目線K24を形成する代わりに、側面部30に切目線K24と同様の構成の切目線を形成してもよい。この場合でも、陳列における正面側の横幅を長くすることができる。 In the example of FIG. 21, it is assumed that the cut line K24 is formed on the side surface portion 20, but instead of forming the cut line K24 on the side surface portion 20, a cut line having the same configuration as the cut line K24 is formed on the side surface portion 30. You may. Even in this case, the width of the front side of the display can be increased.

なお、図21に示すように、先端部が本体部に対して折曲する構成の片部から連設された部材を陳列における正面側と背面側とする方法としては、図22に示す構成としてもよい。すなわち、図22に示す包装箱1Aの本体部3Bにおいては、第2片部70から折れ線C7−1、C7−2を介して背面部40が連設され、第3片部80から折れ線C9を介して正面部10が連設され、第1片部から折れ線C6を介して側面部20が連設され、第4片部90から折れ線C8を介して側面部30が連設されている。また、副体部101Aにおいては、フラップ170が、上面部150の右側面側の辺部から連設されている。フラップ170は、後述の副体部101Bのフラップ170と同一の構成である。また、上面部150においては、右側面側に突状部155、157が形成されている。突状部155、157は、後述の副体部101Bの上面部150の突状部155、157と同一の構成である。また、突状部158は、上面部150の本体部152の左側面側の辺部に沿って設けられている。上面部150から連設された背面部140は、分離部44の外側の面に接着される。なお、図22において、図22に示す突状部155、157の代わりに、図26に示す突状部153B、155、157を設けてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 21, as a method of forming the front side and the back side in the display, the members connected from one part of the structure in which the tip portion is bent with respect to the main body portion are as the configuration shown in FIG. May be good. That is, in the main body portion 3B of the packaging box 1A shown in FIG. 22, the back surface portion 40 is continuously provided from the second piece portion 70 via the polygonal lines C7-1 and C7-2, and the polygonal line C9 is provided from the third piece portion 80. The front surface portion 10 is continuously provided via the first piece portion, the side surface portion 20 is continuously provided from the first piece portion via the polygonal line C6, and the side surface portion 30 is continuously provided from the fourth piece portion 90 via the polygonal line C8. Further, in the sub-body portion 101A, the flap 170 is continuously provided from the side portion on the right side surface side of the upper surface portion 150. The flap 170 has the same configuration as the flap 170 of the accessory portion 101B described later. Further, in the upper surface portion 150, the protruding portions 155 and 157 are formed on the right side surface side. The projecting portions 155 and 157 have the same configuration as the projecting portions 155 and 157 of the upper surface portion 150 of the auxiliary body portion 101B described later. Further, the protruding portion 158 is provided along the side portion on the left side surface side of the main body portion 152 of the upper surface portion 150. The back surface portion 140 continuously provided from the upper surface portion 150 is adhered to the outer surface of the separation portion 44. In FIG. 22, instead of the protruding portions 155 and 157 shown in FIG. 22, the protruding portions 153B, 155 and 157 shown in FIG. 26 may be provided.

図22に示す構成によっても、第2片部70や第3片部80から連設された部材(背面部40、正面部10)の横方向の長さが、第1片部60や第4片部90から連設された部材(側面部20、30)の横方向の長さよりも長い場合に、陳列における正面側(図22では、正面部10側)の横幅を長くすることができる。 Even with the configuration shown in FIG. 22, the lateral lengths of the members (back surface portion 40, front surface portion 10) serially connected to the second piece portion 70 and the third piece portion 80 are the first piece portion 60 and the fourth. When it is longer than the lateral length of the members (side surface portions 20, 30) connected from the one portion 90, the lateral width of the front side (front portion 10 side in FIG. 22) in the display can be increased.

なお、図21の構成と図22の構成とを比較すると、図22の構成では、本体部3Bにおいて、スリーブ状部5を構成する各部の構成が図3の構成と異なるとともに、副体部101Aの構成も図5に示す副体部101の構成と異なるのに対して、図21に示す構成では、図3の構成に対して、正面部10と側面部20の構成を変更すればよく、また、副体部の構成は、図5に示す構成のままでよいので、少ない手間で、図3の構成と図21の構成の両方を得ることができるといえる。 Comparing the configuration of FIG. 21 and the configuration of FIG. 22, in the configuration of FIG. 22, in the main body portion 3B, the configuration of each portion constituting the sleeve-shaped portion 5 is different from the configuration of FIG. Is also different from the configuration of the sub-body portion 101 shown in FIG. 5, whereas in the configuration shown in FIG. 21, the configurations of the front portion 10 and the side surface portion 20 may be changed from the configuration of FIG. Further, since the configuration of the sub-body portion may be the same as that shown in FIG. 5, it can be said that both the configuration of FIG. 3 and the configuration of FIG. 21 can be obtained with less effort.

また、上記の説明においては、副体部101におけるフラップは上面部150における1つの辺部のみから連設されているとしたが、図23に示すように、上面部150における相対する2つの辺部からフラップが連設された構成としてもよい。すなわち、図23に示す副体部101Bにおいては、フラップ160が、上面部150の左側面側の辺部から折れ線C13−1、C13−2、C13−3を介して連設されているとともに、フラップ170が、上面部150の右側面側の辺部から折れ線C14−1、C14−2、C14−3を介して連設されている。 Further, in the above description, the flaps in the sub-body portion 101 are connected from only one side portion in the upper surface portion 150, but as shown in FIG. 23, the two opposing sides in the upper surface portion 150 are connected. The flaps may be connected continuously from the part. That is, in the sub-body portion 101B shown in FIG. 23, the flap 160 is continuously provided from the side portion on the left side surface side of the upper surface portion 150 via the polygonal lines C13-1, C13-2, and C13-3. The flap 170 is continuously provided from the side portion on the right side surface side of the upper surface portion 150 via the polygonal lines C14-1, C14-2, and C14-3.

フラップ(第2フラップ)170は、副体部101Bの展開状態において、前後方向の中心線を介してフラップ160と左右対称に形成されている以外は同様の構成である。すなわち、フラップ170は、略台形形状を呈している。副体部101Bを閉状態にした際には、フラップ170は、側面部30の内側に側面部30の内側の面に沿って配置される。 The flap (second flap) 170 has the same configuration except that the flap (second flap) 170 is formed symmetrically with the flap 160 via the center line in the front-rear direction in the deployed state of the accessory portion 101B. That is, the flap 170 has a substantially trapezoidal shape. When the accessory portion 101B is closed, the flap 170 is arranged inside the side surface portion 30 along the inner surface of the side surface portion 30.

また、副体部101Bにおいては、上面部150の右側面側に突状部(第2突状部)155、157が設けられている。突状部155は、副体部101Bの展開状態において、前後方向の中心線を介して突状部154と左右対称に形成されている以外は同様の構成であり、また、突状部157は、副体部101Bの展開状態において、前後方向の中心線を介して突状部156と左右対称に形成されている以外は同様の構成である。突状部155と突状部157は、副体部101Bの展開状態において、上面部150とフラップ170の境界位置に切込みを形成することにより設けられている。 Further, in the sub-body portion 101B, a protruding portion (second protruding portion) 155, 157 is provided on the right side surface side of the upper surface portion 150. The projecting portion 155 has the same configuration as the projecting portion 154 in the deployed state of the subbody portion 101B, except that the projecting portion 154 is formed symmetrically with the projecting portion 154 via the center line in the front-rear direction, and the projecting portion 157 has the same configuration. In the deployed state of the sub-body portion 101B, the configuration is the same except that the sub-body portion 101B is formed symmetrically with the protruding portion 156 via the center line in the front-rear direction. The protruding portion 155 and the protruding portion 157 are provided by forming a notch at the boundary position between the upper surface portion 150 and the flap 170 in the expanded state of the subbody portion 101B.

つまり、突状部155と突状部157は、ともに先端側に行くほど幅狭(つまり、前後方向の長さが短くなる)となる略台形形状に形成され、突状部155、157の基端から先端までの長さは、副体部101Bを閉状態にした際(つまり、副体部101Bの閉状態において、上面部150は、本体部3の上面をカバーしている)、突状部155、157の内側の面(つまり、上面部150が本体部3の上面をカバーした状態では、突状部155、157の下面)が側面部30の上辺の上側にあって該上辺に接する長さとなっている。具体的には、突状部155、157の先端が、側面部30の外側の面よりも右側面側に若干突出する長さとなっている。なお、上面部150の撓み具合によっては、突状部155、157の内側の面の一部のみが側面部30の上辺に接し、突状部155、157の内側の面における他の部分は側面部30の上辺の上方に位置する場合もあり、また、上面部150の撓み具合によっては、副体部101Bを閉状態で静置した場合には、突状部155、157が側面部30の上辺に接触せずに側面部30の上辺の上方に位置する場合もあるが(この場合でも、上方から上面部150を押さえることにより、突状部155、157が側面部30の上辺に接触する)、いずれにしても突状部155、157が側面部30の上辺の上側にある。つまり、突状部155、157の内側の面が側面部30の上辺の上側にあるためには、突状部155、157の先端が、左右方向において側面部30の内側の面よりも右側面側(つまり、外側)であればよい。突状部155と突状部157は、同大同形状に形成されている。 That is, both the protruding portion 155 and the protruding portion 157 are formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the width becomes narrower (that is, the length in the front-rear direction becomes shorter) toward the tip side, and the base of the protruding portions 155 and 157. The length from the end to the tip is convex when the sub-body portion 101B is closed (that is, in the closed state of the sub-body portion 101B, the upper surface portion 150 covers the upper surface of the main body portion 3). The inner surface of the portions 155 and 157 (that is, the lower surface of the protruding portion 155 and 157 when the upper surface portion 150 covers the upper surface of the main body portion 3) is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 30 and is in contact with the upper side. It is the length. Specifically, the tip of the projecting portion 155, 157 has a length slightly protruding toward the right side surface from the outer surface of the side surface portion 30. Depending on the degree of bending of the upper surface portion 150, only a part of the inner surface of the protruding portion 155 and 157 is in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 30, and the other portion of the inner surface of the protruding portion 155 and 157 is the side surface. It may be located above the upper side of the portion 30, and depending on the degree of bending of the upper surface portion 150, when the accessory portion 101B is allowed to stand in the closed state, the protruding portions 155 and 157 are located on the side surface portion 30. It may be located above the upper side of the side surface portion 30 without touching the upper side (even in this case, by pressing the upper surface portion 150 from above, the protruding portions 155 and 157 come into contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 30. ), In any case, the protruding portions 155 and 157 are on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 30. That is, in order for the inner surface of the projecting portion 155, 157 to be on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 30, the tip of the projecting portion 155, 157 is a surface on the right side of the inner surface of the side surface portion 30 in the left-right direction. It may be on the side (that is, the outside). The protruding portion 155 and the protruding portion 157 are formed in the same shape.

副体部101Bによれば、上面部150の右側面側において、フラップ170が連設されているとともに、フラップ170が連設されていない箇所には、突状部155、157が設けられているので、副体部101Bを閉状態にした際に、側面部30の上辺の内側には上方に開口した隙間が形成されず、ゴミや埃が入るのを防止することができる。 According to the sub-body portion 101B, the flaps 170 are continuously provided on the right side surface side of the upper surface portion 150, and the protruding portions 155 and 157 are provided in the places where the flaps 170 are not connected. Therefore, when the sub-body portion 101B is closed, a gap opened upward is not formed inside the upper side of the side surface portion 30, and it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering.

また、突状部155、157が設けられているので、副体部101Bを閉状態にした際には、突状部155、157の下面が側面部30の上辺の上側にあるので、副体部101Bの閉状態における包装箱の強度を高く維持することができ、例えば、上面部150に対して上から力が加わっても、上面部150が下方に沈み込むのを防止することができる。 Further, since the projecting portions 155 and 157 are provided, when the sub-body portion 101B is closed, the lower surface of the projecting portions 155 and 157 is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 30, so that the sub-body portion is provided. The strength of the packaging box in the closed state of the portion 101B can be maintained high, and for example, even if a force is applied to the upper surface portion 150 from above, the upper surface portion 150 can be prevented from sinking downward.

また、包装箱を図24〜図26に示す包装箱1Bのように、本体部3Cと副体部101Cにより構成したものとしてもよい。 Further, the packaging box may be composed of the main body portion 3C and the sub-body portion 101C as in the packaging box 1B shown in FIGS. 24 to 26.

本体部3Cは、図4の本体部3と比べると、スリーブ状部5の構成が異なり、側面部30、正面部10、側面部20、背面部40、糊代部49の順に折れ線を介して連設されており、正面部10は、側面部30から折れ線C1を介して連設され、側面部20は、正面部10から折れ線C2を介して連設され、背面部40は、側面部20から折れ線C3を介して連設され、糊代部49は、背面部40から折れ線C4を介して連設されている。 The main body portion 3C has a different structure of the sleeve-shaped portion 5 from the main body portion 3 of FIG. The front surface portion 10 is continuously connected from the side surface portion 30 via the polygonal line C1, the side surface portion 20 is continuously provided from the front surface portion 10 via the polygonal line C2, and the back surface portion 40 is connected to the side surface portion 20. The glue margin portion 49 is continuously connected from the back surface portion 40 via the polygonal line C4.

また、第1片部60は、側面部30の下辺から折れ線C6を介して連設され、第2片部70は、正面部10の下辺から折れ線C7を介して連設され、第3片部80は、背面部40の下辺から折れ線C9−1、C9−2を介して連設され、第4片部90は、側面部20の下辺から折れ線8を介して連設されている。側面部20が本体部3Cにおける左側面側の面を構成し、側面部30が本体部3Cにおける右側面側の面を構成する。 Further, the first piece portion 60 is continuously connected from the lower side of the side surface portion 30 via the polygonal line C6, and the second piece portion 70 is continuously provided from the lower side of the front surface portion 10 via the polygonal line C7, and the third piece portion 70 is connected. The 80 is continuously connected from the lower side of the back surface portion 40 via the polygonal lines C9-1 and C9-2, and the fourth piece 90 is continuously connected from the lower side of the side surface portion 20 via the polygonal line 8. The side surface portion 20 constitutes a surface on the left side surface side of the main body portion 3C, and the side surface portion 30 constitutes a surface on the right side surface side of the main body portion 3C.

本体部3Cにおける正面部10は、本体部3における正面部10と同様の構成であるが、正面部10の上辺10Taは側面部20の上辺と同じ高さ位置にあり、正面部10の上辺10Tbは側面部30の上辺と同じ高さ位置にある。また、本体部3Cにおける側面部20は、本体部3における側面部20と同一の構成であり、本体部3Cにおける側面部30は、本体部3における側面部30と同一の構成であり、本体部3Cにおける背面部40は、本体部3における背面部40と同一の構成である。背面部40は、切目線K44を介して本体部42と分離部44とに区画されている。 The front portion 10 in the main body portion 3C has the same configuration as the front portion 10 in the main body portion 3, but the upper side 10Ta of the front portion 10 is at the same height as the upper side of the side surface portion 20, and the upper side 10Tb of the front portion 10 Is at the same height as the upper side of the side surface portion 30. Further, the side surface portion 20 in the main body portion 3C has the same configuration as the side surface portion 20 in the main body portion 3, and the side surface portion 30 in the main body portion 3C has the same configuration as the side surface portion 30 in the main body portion 3. The back surface portion 40 in 3C has the same configuration as the back surface portion 40 in the main body portion 3. The back surface portion 40 is divided into a main body portion 42 and a separation portion 44 via a cut line K44.

また、底面部50は、本体部3における底面部3と同様の構成であるが、第4片部90には本体部3の場合と比べて切欠部が設けられていないので、第3片部80の先端部84には、切欠部K84のような切欠部は設けられていない。 Further, the bottom surface portion 50 has the same configuration as the bottom surface portion 3 of the main body portion 3, but the fourth piece portion 90 is not provided with a notch as compared with the case of the main body portion 3, so that the third piece portion is provided. The tip 84 of the 80 is not provided with a notch like the notch K84.

なお、糊代部49は、側面部30における背面側の領域に接着されるが、フラップ160が側面部30に沿って側面部30の内側に差し込まれるので、糊代部49は側面部30の外側の面に接着するのが好ましい。なお、糊代部49を側面部30の内側の面に接着してもよい。 The glue margin portion 49 is adhered to the area on the back surface side of the side surface portion 30, but since the flap 160 is inserted inside the side surface portion 30 along the side surface portion 30, the glue margin portion 49 is the side surface portion 30. It is preferable to adhere to the outer surface. The glue margin portion 49 may be adhered to the inner surface of the side surface portion 30.

また、本体部3Cの底面部50においては、本体部3の底面部50と同様に、先端部74が第1片部60の下面に接着され、先端部84が第4片部90の下面に接着される。 Further, in the bottom surface portion 50 of the main body portion 3C, the tip portion 74 is adhered to the lower surface of the first piece portion 60 and the tip portion 84 is attached to the lower surface of the fourth piece portion 90, similarly to the bottom surface portion 50 of the main body portion 3. Be glued.

また、副体部101Cは、副体部101Bと略同様の構成であるが、上面部150において、左側面側に3つの突状部(第2突状部)153A、154、156が設けられるとともに、右側面側に3つの突状部153B、155、157が設けられている点が異なり、また、フラップ160、170と正面部110の構成が異なる。 Further, the sub-body portion 101C has substantially the same configuration as the sub-body portion 101B, but the upper surface portion 150 is provided with three projecting portions (second projecting portions) 153A, 154, and 156 on the left side surface side. At the same time, the difference is that three projecting portions 153B, 155, and 157 are provided on the right side surface side, and the configurations of the flaps 160 and 170 and the front portion 110 are different.

すなわち、上面部150においては、突状部153Bが、本体部152の右側面側における正面側の端部から右側面側に突出して形成され、折れ線C14−1の正面側の端部から折れ線C14−1に対して鈍角に形成された直線状の辺部153Baと、辺部153Baの端部から連設され、折れ線C14−1と平行に形成された辺部153Bbと、辺部153Bbの端部から連設され略円弧状に形成された辺部153Bcと、辺部153Bcの端部から連設され折れ線C11の延長線上に形成された辺部153Bdとを有している。突状部153Aは、前後方向の中心線を介して突状部153Bと左右対称に形成されている。 That is, in the upper surface portion 150, the protruding portion 153B is formed so as to project from the front side end portion on the right side surface side of the main body portion 152 toward the right side surface side, and the polygonal line C14 is formed from the front side end portion of the polygonal line C14-1. A linear side portion 153Ba formed at an blunt angle with respect to -1, a side portion 153Bb connected from the end portion of the side portion 153Ba and formed in parallel with the polygonal line C14-1, and an end portion of the side portion 153Bb. It has a side portion 153Bc serially formed from the side portion 153Bc and formed in a substantially arc shape, and a side portion 153Bd serially formed from the end portion of the side portion 153Bc and formed on an extension line of the polygonal line C11. The protruding portion 153A is formed symmetrically with the protruding portion 153B via the center line in the front-rear direction.

また、突状部154、156の構成は、副体部101Bにおける突状部154、156と同様の構成であるが、副体部101Cにおいては、突状部153Aが設けられていることから、副体部101Bの場合と比べて、突状部154、156は背面側にずれた位置に設けられている。また、突状部155は、該中心線を介して左右対称に形成され、突状部157は、該中心線を介して左右対称に形成されている。 Further, the configuration of the projecting portions 154 and 156 is the same as that of the projecting portions 154 and 156 in the sub-body portion 101B, but the sub-body portion 101C is provided with the projecting portions 153A. Compared with the case of the sub-body portion 101B, the protruding portions 154 and 156 are provided at positions shifted to the back surface side. Further, the projecting portion 155 is formed symmetrically via the center line, and the projecting portion 157 is formed symmetrically via the center line.

また、フラップ(第2フラップ)160は、副体部101のフラップ160と略同様の構成であるが、その形状が若干異なり、折れ線C13−1の正面側の端部から連設され、折れ線C13−1に対して鈍角をなす辺部160fと、辺部160eの端部から連設され、折れ線C13−1の方向に対して直角をなす直線状の辺部160aと、辺部160aの端部から連設され略円弧状を呈する辺部160bと、辺部160bの端部から連設され、折れ線C13−1〜C13−3と平行な直線状の辺部160cと、辺部160cの端部から連設され略円弧状を呈する辺部160dと、辺部160dの端部から連設され、折れ線C13−3の背面側の端部まで形成され、折れ線C13−3に対して鋭角に傾斜した直線状の辺部160eとを有している。つまり、フラップ160の正面側の先端が略直角をなし、また、辺部160eが設けられている点が、主として副体部101のフラップ160と異なる。なお、辺部160fは、副体部101Cの展開状態において、突状部153Aの辺部(突状部153Bの辺部153Baと左右対称の辺部)と対向しており、辺部160fと突状部153Aの辺部とは、切込みを介して隣接している。 Further, the flap (second flap) 160 has substantially the same configuration as the flap 160 of the sub-body portion 101, but its shape is slightly different, and the flap (second flap) 160 is continuously provided from the front end portion of the folding line C13-1. A side portion 160f having an acute angle with respect to -1, a linear side portion 160a connected from the end portion of the side portion 160e and forming a right angle with respect to the direction of the bending line C13-1, and an end portion of the side portion 160a. The side portion 160b which is continuously connected from the side and has a substantially arc shape, the linear side portion 160c which is continuously connected from the end portion of the side portion 160b and parallel to the bending lines C13-1 to C13-3, and the end portion of the side portion 160c. A side portion 160d which is continuously connected from the side and has a substantially arc shape, and a side portion 160d which is continuously connected from the end portion of the side portion 160d and formed up to the end portion on the back side of the folding line C13-3, which is inclined at an acute angle with respect to the folding line C13-3. It has a linear side portion 160e. That is, it is different from the flap 160 of the sub-body portion 101 in that the tip on the front side of the flap 160 forms a substantially right angle and the side portion 160e is provided. The side portion 160f faces the side portion of the protruding portion 153A (the side portion symmetrical with the side portion 153Ba of the protruding portion 153B) in the expanded state of the subbody portion 101C, and protrudes from the side portion 160f. It is adjacent to the side portion of the shaped portion 153A via a notch.

また、フラップ(第2フラップ)170は、副体部101Cの展開状態において、前後方向の中心線を介してフラップ160と左右対称に形成されている以外は同様の構成である。 Further, the flap (second flap) 170 has the same configuration except that the flap (second flap) 170 is formed symmetrically with the flap 160 via the center line in the front-rear direction in the deployed state of the accessory portion 101C.

また、副体部101Cの正面部110は、副体部101の正面部110と略同様の構成であるが、その形状と基端から先端までの長さが異なる。 Further, the front portion 110 of the sub-body portion 101C has substantially the same configuration as the front portion 110 of the sub-body portion 101, but its shape and the length from the base end to the tip are different.

すなわち、正面部110は、上面部150との折れ線C11の左側面側の端部から折れ線C11に対して直角方向に連設された直線状の辺部110a−1と、辺部110a−1の端部から連設され、折れ線C11の方向に対して鋭角に傾斜した直線状の辺部110a−2と、辺部110a−2の端部から連設された円弧状(略円弧状としてもよい)の辺部110bと、辺部110bの端部から連設された直線状の辺部110cと、辺部110cの端部から連設された円弧状(略円弧状としてもよい)の辺部110dと、辺部110dの端部から連設され、折れ線C11の方向に対して鋭角に傾斜した直線状の辺部110e−2と、辺部110e−2の端部から折れ線C11の右側面側の端部まで形成され、折れ線C11と直角をなす直線状の辺部110e−1とを有している。つまり、辺部110a−2、110e−2がテーパ状に形成され、正面部110が先細りの形状となっている。 That is, the front portion 110 is a linear side portion 110a-1 and a side portion 110a-1 connected in a direction perpendicular to the bent line C11 from the end portion on the left side surface side of the bent line C11 with the upper surface portion 150. A linear side portion 110a-2 that is continuously provided from the end portion and is inclined at an acute angle with respect to the direction of the bending line C11, and an arc shape (may be a substantially arc shape) that is continuously provided from the end portion of the side portion 110a-2. ), A linear side portion 110c connected from the end portion of the side portion 110b, and an arc-shaped (may be substantially arcuate) side portion connected from the end portion of the side portion 110c. 110d and a straight side portion 110e-2 which is connected from the end portion of the side portion 110d and inclined at an acute angle with respect to the direction of the folding line C11, and the right side surface side of the folding line C11 from the end portion of the side portion 110e-2. It has a linear side portion 110e-1 formed up to the end portion of the above and forming an acute angle with the folding line C11. That is, the side portions 110a-2 and 110e-2 are formed in a tapered shape, and the front portion 110 has a tapered shape.

ここで、正面部110の基端から先端までの長さ(折れ線C11と辺部110c間の長さ)L110は、副体部101の正面部110における長さL110よりも短く形成され、副体部101Cを閉状態にした場合に、正面部110の先端は、底面部50に接っしない。なお、長さL110は、正面部10の切欠部K10の上下方向の長さL11aよりも長く形成され、また、正面部110の辺部110cの長さは、切欠部K10の左右方向の長さL11bよりも長く形成されていて、副体部101Cを閉状態にした場合に、正面部110により切欠部K10が内側から閉じた状態となり、本体部3の正面側が閉じた状態(つまり、正面部10の内側からカバーされた状態)となる。副体部101Cは、その展開状態において、前後方向の中心線を介して左右対称に形成されている。 Here, the length (length between the polygonal line C11 and the side portion 110c) L110 from the base end to the tip end of the front surface portion 110 is formed to be shorter than the length L110 in the front surface portion 110 of the subbody portion 101, and is a subbody. When the portion 101C is closed, the tip of the front portion 110 does not touch the bottom portion 50. The length L110 is formed to be longer than the vertical length L11a of the notch K10 of the front portion 10, and the length of the side portion 110c of the front portion 110 is the length of the notch K10 in the left-right direction. It is formed longer than L11b, and when the sub-body portion 101C is closed, the notch portion K10 is closed from the inside by the front portion 110, and the front side of the main body portion 3 is closed (that is, the front portion). It is in a state of being covered from the inside of 10. The accessory portion 101C is formed symmetrically with respect to the center line in the front-rear direction in the deployed state.

なお、本体部3Cと副体部101Cは、本体部3と副体部101の場合と同様に、分離部44の箇所で互いに接着されている。つまり、分離部44の外側の面と背面部40の内側の面とが接着剤その他の接着手段により接着されることにより、包装箱201が全体に一体に形成される。該接着剤層の接着力は、背面部40を外側に引っ張った場合に、切目線K44が破れて分離部44が本体部3Cから分離し、分離部44が、背面部40に接着した状態で背面部40に従動するような接着力である。 The main body portion 3C and the sub-body portion 101C are adhered to each other at the separation portion 44, as in the case of the main body portion 3 and the sub-body portion 101. That is, the outer surface of the separation portion 44 and the inner surface of the back surface portion 40 are adhered to each other by an adhesive or other adhesive means, so that the packaging box 201 is integrally formed as a whole. The adhesive force of the adhesive layer is such that when the back surface portion 40 is pulled outward, the cut line K44 is broken, the separation portion 44 is separated from the main body portion 3C, and the separation portion 44 is adhered to the back surface portion 40. The adhesive force is such that it follows the back surface portion 40.

また、本体部3Cと副体部101Cが接着された状態では、背面部40の上辺40Ta、40Tb、40Tcと折れ線C12とが高さ方向に略一致(一致としてもよい)した状態となっており、厳密には、折れ線C12が上辺40Ta〜40Tcよりも若干上側となっている。これにより、上面部150により本体部3Cの上面を閉じた際に、突状部154、156、153Aが側面部20の上辺に接するとともに突状部155、157、153Bが側面部30の上辺に接し、上面部150と側面部20、30の上辺との間の隙間が形成されるのを防止することができる。 Further, in the state where the main body portion 3C and the sub-body portion 101C are adhered to each other, the upper sides 40Ta, 40Tb, 40Tc of the back surface portion 40 and the polygonal line C12 are substantially aligned (may be matched) in the height direction. Strictly speaking, the polygonal line C12 is slightly above the upper side 40Ta to 40Tc. As a result, when the upper surface of the main body 3C is closed by the upper surface portion 150, the projecting portions 154, 156, 153A are in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 20, and the projecting portions 155, 157, 153B are on the upper side of the side surface portion 30. It is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the upper surface portion 150 and the upper sides of the side surface portions 20 and 30 in contact with each other.

また、本体部3Cと副体部101Cが接着された状態では、背面部40の下端と背面部40の下端が一致(略一致としてもよい)している。 Further, in a state where the main body portion 3C and the sub-body portion 101C are adhered to each other, the lower end of the back surface portion 40 and the lower end of the back surface portion 40 are aligned (may be substantially the same).

上記構成の包装箱1Bの製造工程は、包装箱1の製造工程と略同様である。すなわち、まず、展開状態の本体部3Cと副体部101Cとを製造する。次に、副体部101Cの内側の面に本体部3Cの外側の面を接着させる(第1接着工程)。つまり、展開状態の副体部101Cの内側の面を上側にして、背面部40における分離部44との接着領域に接着剤を塗布して、展開状態の本体部3Cを重ねる。これにより、分離部44と背面部40が接着される(第1接着工程)。その際、背面部40の下辺と背面部40の下辺とが一致する(略一致するとしてもよい)ようにする。なお、分離部44の外側の面の領域に接着剤を塗布して、分離部44を背面部40に接着させてもよい。 The manufacturing process of the packaging box 1B having the above configuration is substantially the same as the manufacturing process of the packaging box 1. That is, first, the main body portion 3C and the sub-body portion 101C in the expanded state are manufactured. Next, the outer surface of the main body portion 3C is adhered to the inner surface of the sub-body portion 101C (first bonding step). That is, with the inner surface of the sub-body portion 101C in the unfolded state facing upward, the adhesive is applied to the adhesive region with the separated portion 44 on the back surface portion 40, and the main body portion 3C in the unfolded state is overlapped. As a result, the separated portion 44 and the back surface portion 40 are bonded (first bonding step). At that time, the lower side of the back surface portion 40 and the lower side of the back surface portion 40 are made to match (may be substantially the same). An adhesive may be applied to the region of the outer surface of the separation portion 44 to adhere the separation portion 44 to the back surface portion 40.

次に、本体部3Cの底面部50を構成する各部をスリーブ状部5に対して内側に折り返し、さらに、第2片部70の先端部74を本体部72に対して外側に折り返すとともに、第3片部80の先端部84を本体部82に対して外側に折り返す。つまり、第1片部60を折れ線C6を介して側面部30側に折り返し、第2片部70を折れ線C7を介して正面部10側に折り返し、第3片部80を折れ線C9−1、C9−2を介して背面部40側に折り返し、第4片部90を折れ線C8を介して側面部20側に折り返し、さらに、先端部74を本体部72に対して折り返すとともに、先端部84を本体部82に対して折り返す。 Next, each portion constituting the bottom surface portion 50 of the main body portion 3C is folded back inward with respect to the sleeve-shaped portion 5, and the tip portion 74 of the second piece portion 70 is folded outward with respect to the main body portion 72. 3 The tip portion 84 of the piece portion 80 is folded outward with respect to the main body portion 82. That is, the first piece 60 is folded back toward the side surface portion 30 via the polygonal line C6, the second piece 70 is folded back toward the front portion 10 via the polygonal line C7, and the third piece 80 is folded back toward the front portion 10 via the polygonal line C9-1, C9. Fold back to the back surface 40 side via -2, fold back the fourth piece 90 to the side surface portion 20 side via the polygonal line C8, further fold the tip portion 74 with respect to the main body portion 72, and the tip portion 84 to the main body. Fold back to the part 82.

次に、先端部74の領域に接着剤を塗布して(接着剤塗布工程)、側面部30を折れ線C1を介して正面部10の側に内側に折り返す(第2折り返し工程)ことにより、先端部74が第1片部60に接着される(第2接着工程)。なお、先端部74の代わりに、第1片部60における先端部74との接着領域に接着剤を塗布してもよい。 Next, an adhesive is applied to the region of the tip portion 74 (adhesive application step), and the side surface portion 30 is folded inward toward the front portion 10 via the folding line C1 (second folding step). The portion 74 is adhered to the first piece portion 60 (second bonding step). Instead of the tip portion 74, an adhesive may be applied to the adhesive region of the first piece portion 60 with the tip portion 74.

次に、先端部84の領域と、糊代部49の領域に接着剤を塗布して(接着剤塗布工程)、背面部40を折れ線C3を介して側面部20の側に内側に折り返す。すると、先端部84と第4片部90が接着され、糊代部49が側面部30の外側の面に接着される(第3接着工程)。なお、糊代部49の代わりに、側面部30における糊代部49との接着領域に接着剤を塗布してもよく、また、先端部84の代わりに、第4片部90における先端部84との接着領域に接着剤を塗布してもよい。以上のようにして、包装箱1Bが製造される。なお、上記の製造は、組立て装置により自動で製造される。以上のように、第1接着工程〜第3接着工程により包装箱1Bを製造できるので、容易に包装箱1Bを製造することができる。なお、糊代部49を側面部30の内側の面に接着する場合には、先端部84に接着剤を塗布した状態で背面部40を折り返し、その後に、先端部74と糊代部49に接着剤を塗布した状態で側面部30を折り返すことになる。 Next, an adhesive is applied to the region of the tip portion 84 and the region of the glue margin portion 49 (adhesive application step), and the back surface portion 40 is folded inward toward the side surface portion 20 via the polygonal line C3. Then, the tip portion 84 and the fourth piece portion 90 are adhered, and the glue margin portion 49 is adhered to the outer surface of the side surface portion 30 (third bonding step). Instead of the glue margin portion 49, an adhesive may be applied to the adhesive region of the side surface portion 30 with the glue margin portion 49, and instead of the tip portion 84, the tip portion 84 of the fourth piece portion 90 may be applied. An adhesive may be applied to the area to be adhered to. As described above, the packaging box 1B is manufactured. The above manufacturing is automatically manufactured by the assembly device. As described above, since the packaging box 1B can be manufactured by the first bonding step to the third bonding step, the packaging box 1B can be easily manufactured. When the glue margin portion 49 is adhered to the inner surface of the side surface portion 30, the back surface portion 40 is folded back with the adhesive applied to the tip portion 84, and then the tip portion 74 and the glue margin portion 49 are attached. The side surface portion 30 will be folded back with the adhesive applied.

包装箱1Bの製造方法によれば、側面部30を正面部10の側に折り返し、さらに、背面部40を側面部20の側に折り返すので、包装箱1の場合に比べて正面部10を折り返す必要がなく、折り返しの操作を行いやすいという効果がある。すなわち、正面部10には切欠部K10が設けられているので、組立て装置により組み立てる場合に、正面部10を治具によりつかんで折り返すのが困難であるが、包装箱1Bの場合には、切欠部K10が設けられた正面部10を折り返す必要がないので、結果として包装箱の製造が容易となる。 According to the manufacturing method of the packaging box 1B, the side surface portion 30 is folded back toward the front surface portion 10, and the back surface portion 40 is folded back toward the side surface portion 20, so that the front surface portion 10 is folded back as compared with the case of the packaging box 1. There is no need, and there is an effect that it is easy to perform the folding operation. That is, since the front portion 10 is provided with the notch K10, it is difficult to grab the front portion 10 with a jig and fold it back when assembling by the assembling device, but in the case of the packaging box 1B, the notch is used. Since it is not necessary to fold back the front portion 10 provided with the portion K10, as a result, the packaging box can be easily manufactured.

なお、本体部3Cと副体部101Cとを接着した際に、本体部3Cと副体部101Cの相対位置が正しいか否かは、上記と同様に、位置合わせ確認用の切込みにより確認することができる。 When the main body portion 3C and the sub-body portion 101C are adhered to each other, whether or not the relative positions of the main body portion 3C and the sub-body portion 101C are correct should be confirmed by a notch for alignment confirmation as described above. Can be done.

なお、上記の製造工程において、第3片部80を側面部30側に折り返し、第4片部90を背面部40側に折り返し、さらに、先端部84を本体部82に対して折り返す工程は、側面部30を正面部10の側に折り返して、先端部74を第1片部60に接着した後で、先端部84の領域と、糊代部49の領域に接着剤を塗布する前に行ってもよい。その場合、上記折返し工程では、第1片部60と第2片部70を折り返して、先端部74を折り返し、その後、先端部74に接着剤を塗布することになる。 In the above manufacturing process, the step of folding the third piece portion 80 toward the side surface portion 30, folding the fourth piece portion 90 toward the back surface portion 40, and further folding the tip portion 84 with respect to the main body portion 82 is This is performed after the side surface portion 30 is folded back toward the front portion 10 and the tip portion 74 is adhered to the first piece portion 60, and then before the adhesive is applied to the region of the tip portion 84 and the region of the glue margin portion 49. You may. In that case, in the folding step, the first piece 60 and the second piece 70 are folded back, the tip portion 74 is folded back, and then the adhesive is applied to the tip portion 74.

また、先端部74への接着剤の塗布は、第2片部70を折り返し先端部74を折り返した状態で行うとしたが、第2片部70を側面部20に対して折り返す前の状態で、先端部74に接着剤を塗布した後に、第2片部70を折り返しながら先端部74を折り返すようにしてもよい。 Further, the adhesive is applied to the tip portion 74 in a state where the second piece portion 70 is folded back and the tip portion 74 is folded back, but the second piece portion 70 is in a state before being folded back with respect to the side surface portion 20. After applying the adhesive to the tip portion 74, the tip portion 74 may be folded back while folding back the second piece portion 70.

また、先端部84への接着剤の塗布は、第3片部80を折り返し先端部84を折り返した状態で行うとしたが、第3片部80を側面部30に対して折り返す前の状態で、先端部84に接着剤を塗布した後に、第3片部80を折り返しながら先端部84を折り返すようにしてもよい。なお、先端部84への接着剤の塗布は、先端部74と第1片部60を接着した後で行ってもよい。 Further, the adhesive is applied to the tip portion 84 in a state where the third piece portion 80 is folded back and the tip portion 84 is folded back, but the third piece portion 80 is in a state before being folded back with respect to the side surface portion 30. After applying the adhesive to the tip portion 84, the tip portion 84 may be folded back while folding back the third piece portion 80. The adhesive may be applied to the tip portion 84 after the tip portion 74 and the first piece portion 60 are adhered to each other.

また、包装箱1Bの使用方法は、包装箱1と同様であり、副体部101Cを閉状態にした際には、正面部110とフラップ160、170が上面部150に対して折り曲げられ、正面部110が正面部10の内側に正面部10の内側の面に沿って配置され、フラップ160が、側面部20の内側に側面部20の内側の面に沿って配置され、フラップ170が、側面部30の内側に側面部30の内側の面に沿って配置され、上面部150は、本体部3Cの上面をカバーした状態となる。 Further, the method of using the packaging box 1B is the same as that of the packaging box 1. When the auxiliary body portion 101C is closed, the front portion 110 and the flaps 160 and 170 are bent with respect to the upper surface portion 150, and the front portion is used. The portion 110 is arranged inside the front portion 10 along the inner surface of the front portion 10, the flap 160 is arranged inside the side portion 20 along the inner surface of the side portion 20, and the flap 170 is arranged on the side surface. It is arranged inside the portion 30 along the inner surface of the side surface portion 30, and the upper surface portion 150 is in a state of covering the upper surface of the main body portion 3C.

なお、図23に示す副体部101Bや図26に示す副体部101Cにおいては、フラップ170が設けられているので、被収納物が箱状等の硬いものである場合には、側面部30と被収納物との間にも隙間を設けて、フラップ170を側面部30の内側に配置できるようにする。 Since the flap 170 is provided in the sub-body portion 101B shown in FIG. 23 and the sub-body portion 101C shown in FIG. 26, when the stored object is a hard object such as a box, the side surface portion 30 is provided. A gap is also provided between the flap 170 and the object to be stored so that the flap 170 can be arranged inside the side surface portion 30.

なお、包装箱1Bにおいても、前後方向の中心面を介して左右対称としてもよい。その場合には、側面部20が本体部3Cの右側面側の面を構成し、側面部30が本体部3Cの左側面側の面を構成する。つまり、本体部第1側面部が左側面側で本体部第2側面部が右側面側とした場合には、側面部20は本体部第1側面部となり、側面部30が本体部第2側面部となり、逆に、本体部第1側面部が右側面側で本体部第2側面部が左側面側とした場合には、側面部20は本体部第2側面部となり、側面部30が本体部第1側面部となる。 The packaging box 1B may also be symmetrical via the central surface in the front-rear direction. In that case, the side surface portion 20 constitutes the surface on the right side surface of the main body portion 3C, and the side surface portion 30 constitutes the surface on the left side surface side of the main body portion 3C. That is, when the first side surface portion of the main body portion is on the left side surface side and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is on the right side surface side, the side surface portion 20 is the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the side surface portion 30 is the second side surface portion of the main body portion. On the contrary, when the first side surface portion of the main body portion is on the right side surface side and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is on the left side surface side, the side surface portion 20 becomes the second side surface portion of the main body portion and the side surface portion 30 becomes the main body portion. It becomes the first side surface part.

なお、本体部3Bにおいて、糊代部49を側面部20から連設してもよく、また、本体部3Cにおいて、糊代部49を側面部30から連設してもよい。 In the main body portion 3B, the glue margin portion 49 may be continuously provided from the side surface portion 20, and in the main body portion 3C, the glue margin portion 49 may be continuously provided from the side surface portion 30.

また、上記の説明において、本体部3の4つの側面はスリーブ状部5により形成されているとしたが、方形状の板状の底面部の各辺から正面部と2つの側面部と背面部とがそれぞれ連設され、正面部と2つの側面部と背面部において隣接する各部が糊代部を介して連設された構成としてもよい。糊代部としては、例えば、2つの側面部において、正面側と背面側とに糊代部が折れ線を介して連設され、正面部と背面部に糊代部が接着された構成とする。このような構成の場合には、正面部と2つの側面部と背面部により側面構成部が構成される。 Further, in the above description, although it is assumed that the four side surfaces of the main body portion 3 are formed by the sleeve-shaped portion 5, the front portion, the two side surface portions, and the back surface portion are formed from each side of the rectangular plate-shaped bottom surface portion. And are connected to each other, and the front part, the two side surface parts, and the back side parts adjacent to each other may be connected to each other via the glue margin part. As the glue margin portion, for example, in the two side surface portions, the glue margin portion is continuously provided on the front side and the back surface side via a broken line, and the glue margin portion is adhered to the front portion and the back surface portion. In the case of such a configuration, the side component portion is configured by the front portion, the two side surface portions, and the back surface portion.

次に、実施例2の包装箱201について説明する。包装箱201は、図27〜図30に示すように構成され、包装箱201は、本体部203と、本体部203に接着して取り付けられた副体部301とを有している。 Next, the packaging box 201 of the second embodiment will be described. The packaging box 201 is configured as shown in FIGS. 27 to 30, and the packaging box 201 has a main body portion 203 and a sub-body portion 301 adhered to the main body portion 203.

本体部203と副体部301は、それぞれ、1枚のシート状のブランク(具体的には、段ボール製(例えば、薄型段ボール製)のブランクであり、厚紙製のブランク等の他の紙製のブランクでもよい)により形成されている。つまり、包装箱201は、段ボール材(特に、両面段ボール材)等の紙製の包装箱である。段ボールにおける断面略波形形状の中芯の段の方向は、図29、図30における円内に示す方向となっていて、本体部203においては、折れ線C21〜C24と平行になっていて(なお、段ボールにおける中芯の段の方向はこれには限られない)、副体部301においては、折れ線C31a、C31b、C32と直角の方向になっている。なお、段ボールにおける中芯の段の方向はこれには限られない)。 Each of the main body portion 203 and the sub-body portion 301 is a blank in the form of a sheet (specifically, a blank made of corrugated cardboard (for example, made of thin corrugated cardboard), and is made of another paper such as a cardboard blank. It may be blank). That is, the packaging box 201 is a paper packaging box such as a corrugated cardboard material (particularly, a double-sided corrugated cardboard material). The direction of the step of the core having a substantially corrugated cross section in the cardboard is the direction shown in the circle in FIGS. 29 and 30, and in the main body 203, it is parallel to the polygonal lines C21 to C24 (note that it is parallel to the polygonal lines C21 to C24). The direction of the step of the core in the cardboard is not limited to this), and in the sub-body portion 301, the direction is perpendicular to the polygonal lines C31a, C31b, and C32. The direction of the core step in corrugated cardboard is not limited to this).

本体部203は、実施例1の本体部3と略同様の構成であるが、正面部210と背面部240の構成が異なる。 The main body portion 203 has substantially the same configuration as the main body portion 3 of the first embodiment, but the configurations of the front portion 210 and the back portion 240 are different.

すなわち、本体部203は、全体に上部が開口した容器状を呈し、図27〜図29等に示すように、スリーブ状部(側面構成部)205と、底面部250とを有している。スリーブ状部205は、包装箱201の組立て状態では、底面部250の周囲から立設して形成され、正面部210と、側面部220と、側面部230と、背面部240と、糊代部249とを有し、正面部210、側面部220、背面部240、側面部230、糊代部249の順に折れ線を介して連設されている。つまり、側面部220は、正面部210から折れ線C21を介して連設され、背面部240は、側面部220から折れ線C22を介して連設され、側面部230は、背面部240から折れ線C23を介して連設され、糊代部249は、側面部230から折れ線C24を介して連設されている。折れ線C21〜C24は、本体部203の展開状態において、互いに平行であり、いずれも直線状を呈している。 That is, the main body portion 203 has a container shape with an open upper portion as a whole, and has a sleeve-shaped portion (side surface constituent portion) 205 and a bottom surface portion 250 as shown in FIGS. 27 to 29 and the like. The sleeve-shaped portion 205 is formed upright from the periphery of the bottom surface portion 250 in the assembled state of the packaging box 201, and has a front surface portion 210, a side surface portion 220, a side surface portion 230, a back surface portion 240, and a glue margin portion. It has 249, and is connected in the order of the front portion 210, the side surface portion 220, the back surface portion 240, the side surface portion 230, and the glue margin portion 249 via a broken line. That is, the side surface portion 220 is continuously connected from the front surface portion 210 via the polygonal line C21, the back surface portion 240 is continuously provided from the side surface portion 220 via the polygonal line C22, and the side surface portion 230 has the polygonal line C23 from the back surface portion 240. The glue margin portion 249 is continuously provided from the side surface portion 230 via the broken line C24. The polygonal lines C21 to C24 are parallel to each other in the unfolded state of the main body portion 203, and both exhibit a linear shape.

ここで、正面部(本体部正面部)210は、方形状(具体的には、長方形状)の外形を有し、左右方向における中央やや上側に差込み片322を差し込むための被差込み部212が設けられている。この被差込み部212は、横長長方形状の開口部214と、開口部214の右側面側の端部から上方に向けて形成された直線状の切込み215と、開口部214の左側面側の端部から上方に向けて形成された直線状の切込み216と、切込み215の上端と切込み216の上端間に形成された折曲げ用の罫線217とを有している。罫線217は、本体部203の内側の面から押圧した押罫である。開口部214と切込み215、216と罫線217により囲まれた領域が片部218となる。開口部214の上辺と下辺及び罫線217は、互いに平行で、正面部210の下辺と平行に形成されている。開口部214の左右方向の長さは、差込み片322を差込み可能なように、差込み片322の左右方向の長さ以上の長さに形成され、また、開口部214の上下方向の長さは、差し込まれた差込み片322が容易に抜けることがない長さに形成され、差込み片322の基端から先端までの長さの半分以下に形成されている。また、差込み片322を被差込み部212に差し込んだ際に、正面部310の本体部320が正面部210の外側の面に沿った状態となるように、正面部210の上辺から開口部214の下辺までの長さL220は、本体部320の基端から先端までの長さL320と略同一となっている。正面部210は、上下方向の中心線を介して左右対称に形成されている。 Here, the front portion (front portion of the main body portion) 210 has a rectangular (specifically, rectangular) outer shape, and the insertion portion 212 for inserting the insertion piece 322 is slightly above the center in the left-right direction. It is provided. The insertion portion 212 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 214, a linear notch 215 formed upward from the end on the right side of the opening 214, and an end on the left side of the opening 214. It has a linear notch 216 formed upward from the portion and a ruled line 217 for bending formed between the upper end of the notch 215 and the upper end of the notch 216. The ruled line 217 is a ruled line pressed from the inner surface of the main body 203. The area surrounded by the openings 214, the cuts 215, 216, and the ruled lines 217 is the one-sided portion 218. The upper and lower sides of the opening 214 and the ruled line 217 are formed to be parallel to each other and parallel to the lower side of the front surface portion 210. The length of the opening 214 in the left-right direction is formed to be longer than the length of the insertion piece 322 in the left-right direction so that the insertion piece 322 can be inserted, and the length of the opening 214 in the vertical direction is The inserted insertion piece 322 is formed to have a length that does not easily come off, and is formed to be less than half the length from the base end to the tip end of the insertion piece 322. Further, when the insertion piece 322 is inserted into the insertion portion 212, the opening portion 214 is formed from the upper side of the front portion 210 so that the main body portion 320 of the front portion 310 is in a state along the outer surface of the front portion 210. The length L220 to the lower side is substantially the same as the length L320 from the base end to the tip end of the main body portion 320. The front portion 210 is formed symmetrically with respect to the center line in the vertical direction.

また、側面部220は、正面部210の左側面側の端部から折れ線C21を介して連設され、方形状(具体的には、長方形状)を呈している。つまり、側面部220の上辺は、側面部220の下辺(第2片部270との間の折れ線C27に沿った辺部)と平行に形成され、側面部220の上辺は、直線状に形成されている。 Further, the side surface portion 220 is continuously provided from the end portion on the left side surface side of the front surface portion 210 via the polygonal line C21, and has a rectangular shape (specifically, a rectangular shape). That is, the upper side of the side surface portion 220 is formed parallel to the lower side of the side surface portion 220 (the side portion along the polygonal line C27 between the second piece portion 270), and the upper side of the side surface portion 220 is formed linearly. ing.

また、側面部230は、背面部240の右側面側の端部から折れ線C23を介して連設され、側面部220と同大同形状に形成されている。側面部230の上辺は、側面部230の下辺(第3片部280との間の折れ線C29に沿った辺部)と平行に形成され、側面部230の上辺は、直線状に形成されている。なお、側面部220の上辺は下辺と平行で、側面部230の上辺は下辺と平行であるとしたが、下辺と平行でなくてもよく、下辺に対して傾斜していてもよい。 Further, the side surface portion 230 is continuously provided from the end portion on the right side surface side of the back surface portion 240 via the polygonal line C23, and is formed in the same shape as the side surface portion 220. The upper side of the side surface portion 230 is formed in parallel with the lower side of the side surface portion 230 (the side portion along the polygonal line C29 between the third piece portion 280), and the upper side of the side surface portion 230 is formed in a straight line. .. Although the upper side of the side surface portion 220 is parallel to the lower side and the upper side of the side surface portion 230 is parallel to the lower side, it may not be parallel to the lower side and may be inclined with respect to the lower side.

なお、本体部第1側面部が左側面側で本体部第2側面部が右側面側とした場合には、側面部220は本体部第1側面部となり、側面部230が本体部第2側面部となり、逆に、本体部第1側面部が右側面側で本体部第2側面部が左側面側とした場合には、側面部220は本体部第2側面部となり、側面部230が本体部第1側面部となる。 When the first side surface portion of the main body portion is on the left side surface side and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is on the right side surface side, the side surface portion 220 is the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the side surface portion 230 is the second side surface portion of the main body portion. On the contrary, when the first side surface portion of the main body portion is on the right side surface side and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is on the left side surface side, the side surface portion 220 becomes the second side surface portion of the main body portion and the side surface portion 230 becomes the main body portion. It becomes the first side surface part.

また、背面部(本体部背面部)240は、側面部220の背面側の端部から折れ線C22を介して連設され、方形状(具体的には、長方形状)における上側の一部を切り欠いた形状を呈し、背面部240の上辺240Ta、240Tbは、同じ高さに形成され(つまり、背面部240の下辺に平行な同一直線状に形成されている)、側面部220の上辺や側面部230の上辺と同じ高さに形成されている。背面部240の上端には、上辺から連設された切欠部K240が形成されていて、切欠部K240は、上辺240Taと上辺240Tb間に形成されている。 Further, the back surface portion (rear surface portion of the main body portion) 240 is continuously provided from the end portion on the back surface side of the side surface portion 220 via the polygonal line C22, and a part of the upper side in a rectangular shape (specifically, a rectangular shape) is cut off. The upper side 240Ta and 240Tb of the back surface 240 are formed at the same height (that is, formed in the same linear shape parallel to the lower side of the back surface 240), and the upper side and the side surface of the side surface 220 are formed in a missing shape. It is formed at the same height as the upper side of the portion 230. A cutout portion K240 continuously provided from the upper side is formed at the upper end of the back surface portion 240, and the cutout portion K240 is formed between the upper side 240Ta and the upper side 240Tb.

切欠部K240は、上辺240Taから連設された略円弧状の辺部240aと、辺部240aの端部から連設され、下方に向けて直線状に形成された辺部240bと、辺部240bの下端から連設され、横方向(背面部240の下辺と平行な方向)に形成された直線状の辺部240cと、辺部240cの左側面側の端部から上方に直線状に形成された辺部240dと、辺部240dの上端から上辺240Tbまで形成された略円弧状の辺部240eとを有し、辺部242cにおける左右両側の位置からは位置合わせ用の切込み240f、240gが上下方向に形成されている。なお、切込み240f、240gは、背面部240の一方の面から他方の面まで貫通している。辺部240aは、上辺240Taと辺部240bがなす角部を円弧状に面取りしており、辺部240eは、上辺240Tbと辺部240dがなす角部を円弧状に面取りしている。なお、背面部240には、切欠部K240が形成されている関係で、辺部240a〜240eも背面部240の上辺を構成するといえる。 The cutout portion K240 has a substantially arcuate side portion 240a connected from the upper side 240Ta, a side portion 240b connected from the end portion of the side portion 240a and formed in a straight line downward, and a side portion 240b. A linear side portion 240c formed in the lateral direction (direction parallel to the lower side of the back surface portion 240) and a linear side portion 240c formed upward from the end portion on the left side surface side of the side portion 240c. It has a side portion 240d and a substantially arcuate side portion 240e formed from the upper end of the side portion 240d to the upper side 240Tb. It is formed in the direction. The cuts 240f and 240g penetrate from one surface of the back surface portion 240 to the other surface. The side portion 240a chamfers the corner portion formed by the upper side 240Ta and the side portion 240b in an arc shape, and the side portion 240e chamfers the corner portion formed by the upper side 240Tb and the side portion 240d in an arc shape. Since the cutout portion K240 is formed on the back surface portion 240, it can be said that the side portions 240a to 240e also form the upper side of the back surface portion 240.

また、背面部240には、辺部240cと切目線K244により囲まれた分離部244が設けられ、切目線K244は、辺部240bの延長線上に下方に向けて形成された切目線K244aと、切目線K244aの下端から連設された略円弧状の切目線K242bと、切目線K244bの端部から横方向(背面部240の下辺と平行な方向)に形成された直線状の切目線K244cと、切目線K244cの左側面側の端部から連設された略円弧状の切目線K244dと、切目線K244dの端部から上方に向けて辺部240dの下端まで形成された切目線K244eとを有していて、切目線K244は全体に略U字状を呈している。切目線K244cは、背面部240の下辺の近傍に設けられている。切目線K244a、K244eは、ミシン目状の切目線(間隔をおきながら連続して形成された切込みにより形成された切目線)であり、切目線K244b、K244c、K244dは、連続した切込みからなる切目線である。つまり、切目線K244は、全体として、切断予定線であるといえる。切目線K244を構成する切目線K244a〜K244eは、背面部240の一方の面から他方の面まで貫通している。辺部240cは、背面部240の上辺の一部であるといえるので、分離部244は、背面部240の上辺の一部である上辺部分(つまり、辺部240c)と切目線K244により囲まれている。 Further, the back surface portion 240 is provided with a separation portion 244 surrounded by a side portion 240c and a cut line K244, and the cut line K244 includes a cut line K244a formed downward on an extension line of the side portion 240b. A substantially arc-shaped cut line K242b continuously connected from the lower end of the cut line K244a, and a linear cut line K244c formed laterally (parallel to the lower side of the back surface portion 240) from the end of the cut line K244b. , A substantially arcuate cut line K244d continuously provided from the end on the left side surface side of the cut line K244c, and a cut line K244e formed upward from the end of the cut line K244d to the lower end of the side portion 240d. The cut line K244 has a substantially U-shape as a whole. The cut line K244c is provided in the vicinity of the lower side of the back surface portion 240. The cut lines K244a and K244e are perforated cut lines (cut lines formed by continuously formed cuts at intervals), and the cut lines K244b, K244c, and K244d are cuts composed of continuous cuts. Looking at you. That is, it can be said that the cut line K244 is the planned cutting line as a whole. The cut lines K244a to K244e constituting the cut line K244 penetrate from one surface of the back surface portion 240 to the other surface. Since the side portion 240c can be said to be a part of the upper side of the back surface portion 240, the separation portion 244 is surrounded by the upper side portion (that is, the side portion 240c) which is a part of the upper side of the back surface portion 240 and the cut line K244. ing.

なお、切目線K244は、略U字状であるとしたが、これには限られず、例えば、切目線K244b〜K244dを円弧状としたU字状としてもよく、また、略V字状としてもよい。 Although the cut line K244 is assumed to be substantially U-shaped, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the cut lines K244b to K244d may be formed into an arc shape, or may be substantially V-shaped. good.

背面部240は、分離部244と、背面部240における分離部244以外の領域である本体部(背面本体部)242とを有しており、上記切欠部K240は、本体部242に形成されている。 The back surface portion 240 has a separation portion 244 and a main body portion (rear surface main body portion) 242 which is a region other than the separation portion 244 in the back surface portion 240, and the notch portion K240 is formed in the main body portion 242. There is.

背面部240は、切目線K244を含めて、上下方向の中心線を介して左右対称に形成され、上辺240Taと上辺240Tb、辺部240aと辺部240e、辺部240bと辺部240d、切目線K244aと切目線242e、切目線K244bと切目線K244dは、それぞれ左右線対称に形成されている。 The back surface portion 240 is formed symmetrically with the center line in the vertical direction including the cut line K244, and has an upper side 240Ta and an upper side 240Tb, a side portion 240a and a side portion 240e, a side portion 240b and a side portion 240d, and a cut line. The cut line 242e and the cut line K244a and the cut line K244b and the cut line K244d are each formed symmetrically on the left and right lines.

また、糊代部249は、側面部230の正面側の端部から折れ線C24を介して連設され、縦方向に細長の略帯状台形形状を呈している。この糊代部249は、その外側の面が正面部210の右側面側の端部領域の内側の面に接着されている。実施例1の場合と異なり、糊代部249が正面部210の内側の面に接着されているのは、副体部301の閉状態において、正面部310の本体部320は正面部210の外側となることから、実施例1のように正面部210の外側の面に接着する必要がないからである。なお、糊代部249を正面部310の外側の面に接着してもよいが、差込み片322が被差込み部212に差し込まれて本体部320が正面部210の外側の面に沿った状態となるため、糊代部249を正面部210の内側の面に接着するのが好ましい。 Further, the glue margin portion 249 is continuously provided from the front end portion of the side surface portion 230 via the polygonal line C24, and has a substantially strip-shaped trapezoidal shape elongated in the vertical direction. The outer surface of the glue margin portion 249 is adhered to the inner surface of the end region on the right side surface side of the front surface portion 210. Unlike the case of the first embodiment, the glue margin portion 249 is adhered to the inner surface of the front portion 210 because the main body portion 320 of the front portion 310 is outside the front portion 210 in the closed state of the subbody portion 301. Therefore, it is not necessary to adhere to the outer surface of the front surface portion 210 as in the first embodiment. The glue margin portion 249 may be adhered to the outer surface of the front portion 310, but the insertion piece 322 is inserted into the insertion portion 212 and the main body portion 320 is along the outer surface of the front portion 210. Therefore, it is preferable to bond the glue margin portion 249 to the inner surface of the front surface portion 210.

なお、本体部203の展開状態において、折れ線C26、C27、C28、C29は同一直線上に形成されている。 In the expanded state of the main body 203, the polygonal lines C26, C27, C28, and C29 are formed on the same straight line.

次に、底面部250は、いわゆるワンタッチ底であり、第1片部(底面部第1片部)260と、第2片部(底面部第2片部)270と、第3片部(底面部第3片部)280と、第4片部(底面部第4片部)290とを有し、包装箱201の組立て状態においては、図38に示すように、略方形状の外形を呈している。 Next, the bottom surface portion 250 is a so-called one-touch bottom, and is a first piece portion (bottom portion first piece portion) 260, a second piece portion (bottom portion second piece portion) 270, and a third piece portion (bottom surface portion). It has a third piece) 280 and a fourth piece (fourth piece on the bottom) 290, and in the assembled state of the packaging box 201, it has a substantially rectangular outer shape as shown in FIG. 38. ing.

底面部250を構成する各部の構成は、先端部284に先端部84における切欠部K84のような切欠部が設けられていない点以外は同一の構成である。 The configuration of each portion constituting the bottom surface portion 250 is the same except that the tip portion 284 is not provided with a notch portion such as the notch portion K84 in the tip portion 84.

すなわち、第1片部260は、正面部210の下端から折れ線C26を介して連設され、先端側にいくほど幅狭となる略台形形状に形成されている。第1片部260は、第1片部60と同一の構成であるので、詳しい説明を省略する。 That is, the first piece portion 260 is continuously provided from the lower end of the front portion 210 via the polygonal line C26, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape that becomes narrower toward the tip side. Since the first piece 260 has the same configuration as the first piece 60, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

また、第2片部270は、側面部220の下端から折れ線C27を介して連設され、略長方形状に形成されている。第2片部270は、第2片部70と同一の構成であるので、詳しい説明を省略する。なお、第2片部270は、折れ線270−1を介して本体部272と先端部274とに区画される。本体部272の先端の先端部274側には、他方の本体部282と互いに係止するように切欠部K272が形成されている。また、先端部274の上面は、第1片部260の下面に接着されている。 Further, the second piece portion 270 is continuously provided from the lower end of the side surface portion 220 via the polygonal line C27, and is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. Since the second piece 270 has the same configuration as the second piece 70, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The second piece portion 270 is divided into a main body portion 272 and a tip portion 274 via a polygonal line 270-1. A notch K272 is formed on the tip end portion 274 side of the tip end portion of the main body portion 272 so as to engage with the other main body portion 282. Further, the upper surface of the tip portion 274 is adhered to the lower surface of the first piece portion 260.

また、第3片部280は、側面部230の下端から折れ線C29を介して連設され、底面部250の組立て状態においては、第2片部270と底面部250の中心位置を介して点対称に形成されている。第3片部280は、第2片部270と点対称である以外は同一の構成であるので、詳しい説明を省略する。なお、第3片部280は、折れ線280−1を介して本体部282と先端部284とに区画される。本体部282の先端の先端部284側には、他方の本体部272と互いに係止するように切欠部K282が形成されている。また、先端部284の上面は、第4片部290の下面に接着されている。 Further, the third piece portion 280 is continuously provided from the lower end of the side surface portion 230 via the polygonal line C29, and is point-symmetrical via the center position of the second piece portion 270 and the bottom surface portion 250 in the assembled state of the bottom surface portion 250. Is formed in. Since the third piece 280 has the same configuration as the second piece 270 except that it is point-symmetrical, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The third piece portion 280 is divided into a main body portion 282 and a tip portion 284 via a polygonal line 280-1. A notch K282 is formed on the tip end portion 284 side of the tip end portion of the main body portion 282 so as to engage with the other main body portion 272. Further, the upper surface of the tip portion 284 is adhered to the lower surface of the fourth piece portion 290.

また、第4片部290は、背面部240の下端から折れ線C28を介して連設され、先端側にいくほど幅狭となる略台形形状に形成されている。第4片部290は、第1片部260と底面部50の中心位置を介して略点対称に形成されている。第4片部290は、第1片部260と点対称である以外は同一の構成であるので、詳しい説明を省略する。 Further, the fourth piece portion 290 is continuously provided from the lower end of the back surface portion 240 via the polygonal line C28, and is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape that becomes narrower toward the tip end side. The fourth piece portion 290 is formed substantially point-symmetrically via the center positions of the first piece portion 260 and the bottom surface portion 50. Since the fourth piece 290 has the same configuration as the first piece 260 except that it is point-symmetrical, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

以上のように、底面部250において、隣接する2つの片部(第1片部260と第2片部270)である底面部第1片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である先端部(第1端部領域)274が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該先端部274が第1片部260に接着され、他の隣接する2つの片部(第3片部280と第4片部290)である底面部第2片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である先端部(第2端部領域)284が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該先端部284が第4片部290に接着されている。 As described above, in the bottom surface portion 250, the tip portion which is the other side portion of one of the pair of the bottom surface portion first piece portion which is two adjacent pieces (first piece portion 260 and second piece portion 270). (First end region) 274 is bendable through a fold line, the tip 274 is adhered to the first piece 260 and the other two adjacent pieces (third piece 280 and fourth). The tip portion (second end region) 284, which is a portion on the other side of the pair of the bottom portion second piece portion, which is one portion 290), can be bent via a bending line, and the tip portion 284 is the first. 4 Adhered to one piece 290.

本体部203を箱状に組み立てた状態では、正面部210と背面部240とが互いに平行になり、側面部220と側面部230とが互いに平行になり、底面部250を構成する各部材は、正面部210、側面部220、230、背面部240に対して略直角(直角でもよい)となる。つまり、スリーブ状部205は、底面部250に対して略直角(直角でもよい)となる。また、スリーブ状部205を構成する各部材(正面部210、側面部220、230、背面部240)における隣接する部材は互いに直角(略直角としてもよい)となっている。 In the state where the main body portion 203 is assembled in a box shape, the front portion 210 and the back portion 240 are parallel to each other, the side surface portion 220 and the side surface portion 230 are parallel to each other, and each member constituting the bottom surface portion 250 is It is substantially at right angles (or at right angles) to the front portion 210, the side portions 220, 230, and the back portion 240. That is, the sleeve-shaped portion 205 is substantially perpendicular (or may be a right angle) to the bottom surface portion 250. Further, the adjacent members in each member (front portion 210, side surface portion 220, 230, back surface portion 240) constituting the sleeve-shaped portion 205 are at right angles to each other (may be substantially right angles).

また、本体部203は、平板状に折り畳むことができ(図34参照)、本体部203においては、正面部210と側面部220との角度を小さくし(つまり、直角より小さくする)、背面部240と側面部230との角度を小さくさせる(つまり、直角より小さくする)ことにより、四角筒状のスリーブ状部205が扁平になるとともに、底面部250を構成する各部がスリーブ状部205内に回動して、本体部203を全体に平板状に折り畳むことができる。本体部203を折り畳んだ状態では、底面部250を構成する各部は、スリーブ状部205内にスリーブ状部205を構成する正面部210、側面部220、230、背面部240に対して略平行な状態となる。 Further, the main body portion 203 can be folded into a flat plate shape (see FIG. 34), and in the main body portion 203, the angle between the front portion 210 and the side surface portion 220 is made smaller (that is, smaller than a right angle), and the back portion is made smaller. By reducing the angle between the 240 and the side surface portion 230 (that is, making it smaller than a right angle), the square tubular sleeve-shaped portion 205 becomes flat, and each portion constituting the bottom surface portion 250 is contained in the sleeve-shaped portion 205. By rotating, the main body 203 can be folded into a flat plate as a whole. When the main body portion 203 is folded, each portion constituting the bottom surface portion 250 is substantially parallel to the front portion 210, the side surface portions 220, 230, and the back surface portion 240 constituting the sleeve-shaped portion 205 in the sleeve-shaped portion 205. It becomes a state.

次に、副体部301は、主として、本体部203の分離部244と接着するとともに、本体部203の上面をカバーするためのものであり、図27、図28、図30に示すように、正面部310と、背面部340と、上面部350と、フラップ360とを有している。 Next, the sub-body portion 301 is mainly for adhering to the separating portion 244 of the main body portion 203 and covering the upper surface of the main body portion 203, and as shown in FIGS. 27, 28, and 30,. It has a front portion 310, a back portion 340, an upper surface portion 350, and a flap 360.

ここで、正面部(副体部正面部)310は、上面部350から折れ線C31aを介して連設された本体部320と、本体部320の先端から折れ線C31bを介して連設された差込み片322とを有している。折れ線C31bは直線状を呈し、折れ線C31aと平行に形成されている。 Here, the front portion (front portion of the sub-body portion) 310 is a main body portion 320 connected from the upper surface portion 350 via the broken line C31a, and an insertion piece connected from the tip of the main body portion 320 via the broken line C31b. It has 322 and. The polygonal line C31b has a linear shape and is formed in parallel with the polygonal line C31a.

本体部320は、折れ線C31aと直角をなす直線状の辺部310aと、辺部310aの端部から連設された略円弧状の辺部310bと、辺部310bの端部から連設され、折れ線C31aと平行な直線状の辺部310cと、折れ線C31bの端部から連設され、折れ線C31aと平行な辺部310dと、辺部310dの端部から連設された略円弧状の辺部310eと、辺部310eの端部から連設され、折れ線C31aに対して直角をなす直線状の辺部310fとを有している。辺部310cと辺部310d間には、差込み片322との間の折れ線C31bが設けられ、辺部310cと折れ線C31bと辺部310dは、同一直線状に形成されている。辺部310bは、辺部310aと辺部310cがなす角部を円弧状に面取りしており、辺部310eは、辺部310fと辺部310dがなす角部を円弧状に面取りしている。 The main body portion 320 is continuously provided from a linear side portion 310a forming a right angle with the folding line C31a, a substantially arcuate side portion 310b connected from the end portion of the side portion 310a, and a continuous side portion 310b. A linear side portion 310c parallel to the folding line C31a, a side portion 310d connected from the end portion of the folding line C31b and parallel to the folding line C31a, and a substantially arcuate side portion connected from the end portion of the side portion 310d. It has a 310e and a linear side portion 310f that is connected to the end of the side portion 310e and forms a right angle with respect to the folding line C31a. A polygonal line C31b between the insertion piece 322 is provided between the side portion 310c and the side portion 310d, and the side portion 310c, the polygonal line C31b, and the side portion 310d are formed in the same linear shape. The side portion 310b chamfers the corner portion formed by the side portion 310a and the side portion 310c in an arc shape, and the side portion 310e chamfers the corner portion formed by the side portion 310f and the side portion 310d in an arc shape.

また、差込み片322は、本体部320の先端から突出して形成され、差込み片322は、辺部310cと直角の直線状の辺部322aと、辺部322aの端部から連設された略円弧状の辺部322bと、辺部322bの端部から連設され折れ線C31bの方向に対して傾斜して形成された辺部322cと、辺部322cの端部から連設され折れ線C31bの方向に対して傾斜して形成された辺部322dと、辺部322dの端部から連設された略円弧状の辺部322eと、辺部322eの端部から辺部310dの端部まで形成され辺部310dに対して直角をなす直線状の辺部322fとを有し、辺部322cは、辺部322d側にいくほど折れ線C31bとの距離が長くなり、辺部322dは、辺部322c側にいくほど折れ線C31bとの距離が長くなり、辺部322cと辺部322dにより差込み片322の先端が尖った形状を呈している。なお、差込み片322は、折れ線C31bに対する直角の中心線を介して、左右線対称に形成されている。 Further, the insertion piece 322 is formed so as to project from the tip of the main body portion 320, and the insertion piece 322 is a linear side portion 322a perpendicular to the side portion 310c and a substantially circular circle connected from the end portion of the side portion 322a. The arc-shaped side portion 322b, the side portion 322c connected from the end portion of the side portion 322b and inclined with respect to the direction of the bent line C31b, and the side portion 322c continuously formed from the end portion of the side portion 322c in the direction of the bent line C31b. A side portion 322d formed so as to be inclined, a substantially arcuate side portion 322e connected from the end portion of the side portion 322d, and a side formed from the end portion of the side portion 322e to the end portion of the side portion 310d. It has a linear side portion 322f forming a right angle to the portion 310d, and the side portion 322c has a longer distance from the bending line C31b toward the side portion 322d side, and the side portion 322d is located on the side portion 322c side. The distance from the broken line C31b becomes longer, and the side portion 322c and the side portion 322d form a sharp tip of the insertion piece 322. The insertion piece 322 is formed symmetrically on the left and right lines via a center line perpendicular to the polygonal line C31b.

また、背面部(副体部背面部)340は、上面部350から折れ線C32を介して連設され、実施例1の背面部140と同一の構成であり、背面部340は、方形状を呈し、その左右方向の長さは、正面部310の左右方向の最大幅(上面部150側の端部における長さ)と同一であり、背面部240の左右方向の長さよりも若干短くなっており、また、上下方向の長さは、背面部240の上下方向の長さ(背面部240の上辺と下辺間の長さ)と略同一に(具体的には、若干長く)形成されていて、背面部340が背面部240に接着された状態では、背面部340の下端と背面部240の下端が一致した状態となっている。なお、背面部340の上面部350側の領域には、位置合わせ確認用の切込みK340、K342が設けられている。切込みK340は切込みK140と同一の構成であり、切込みK342は切込みK142と同一の構成である。すなわち、切込みK340は、逆T字状を呈し、切込みK340は、横方向の切込みK340aと縦方向の切込みK340bとを有している。同様に、切込みK342は、逆T字状を呈し、切込みK342は、横方向の切込みK342aと縦方向の切込みK342bとを有している。なお、切込みK340、K342は、背面部340の背面側の面(包装箱201において背面側に露出した面)に表れないように、正面側から半切れとなっている。 Further, the back surface portion (sub-body portion back surface portion) 340 is continuously provided from the upper surface portion 350 via the folding line C32, and has the same configuration as the back surface portion 140 of the first embodiment, and the back surface portion 340 exhibits a square shape. The length in the left-right direction is the same as the maximum width in the left-right direction of the front portion 310 (the length at the end portion on the upper surface portion 150 side), and is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the back portion 240. Further, the length in the vertical direction is formed to be substantially the same as the length in the vertical direction of the back surface portion 240 (the length between the upper side and the lower side of the back surface portion 240) (specifically, slightly longer). In the state where the back surface portion 340 is adhered to the back surface portion 240, the lower end of the back surface portion 340 and the lower end of the back surface portion 240 are in the same state. Notches K340 and K342 for confirming alignment are provided in the area of the back surface portion 340 on the upper surface portion 350 side. The notch K340 has the same configuration as the notch K140, and the notch K342 has the same configuration as the notch K142. That is, the notch K340 has an inverted T shape, and the notch K340 has a horizontal notch K340a and a vertical notch K340b. Similarly, the notch K342 exhibits an inverted T-shape, and the notch K342 has a lateral notch K342a and a vertical notch K342b. The cuts K340 and K342 are cut in half from the front side so as not to appear on the back side surface (the surface exposed on the back side in the packaging box 201) of the back surface portion 340.

また、上面部350は、実施例1の上面部150と同一の構成であり、上面部350は、略方形状を呈し、方形状の左側面側に突状部354、356を設けるとともに右側面側に突状部358を設けた形状を呈し、上面部350における突状部354、356、358以外の領域が本体部352となり、本体部352は方形状を呈する。本体部352の左右方向の長さは、正面部310の左右方向の最大幅と同一であり、本体部352の前後方向の長さ(折れ線C31aと折れ線C32間の長さ)は、側面部320、330の前後方向の長さと略同一となっている(厳密には、若干長くなっている。つまり、背面部340が背面部240の背面側の面に接着され、正面部310の本体部320が正面部210の外側(正面側)に配置されるので、本体部352の前後方向の長さは、側面部320、330の前後方向の長さよりも若干長くなっている。副体部301の閉状態では、上面部350により本体部203の上面側が閉じた(つまり、カバーされた)状態となる。なお、折れ線C31aと折れ線C32は直線状を呈し互いに平行になっている。 Further, the upper surface portion 350 has the same configuration as the upper surface portion 150 of the first embodiment, and the upper surface portion 350 has a substantially rectangular shape, and the protruding portions 354 and 356 are provided on the left side surface side of the rectangular shape and the right side surface. The shape is provided with the protruding portion 358 on the side, the region other than the protruding portions 354, 356, and 358 on the upper surface portion 350 becomes the main body portion 352, and the main body portion 352 exhibits a square shape. The length in the left-right direction of the main body portion 352 is the same as the maximum width in the left-right direction of the front portion 310, and the length in the front-rear direction of the main body portion 352 (the length between the polygonal line C31a and the polygonal line C32) is the side surface portion 320. , 330 is substantially the same as the length in the front-rear direction (strictly speaking, it is slightly longer. That is, the back portion 340 is adhered to the back surface of the back portion 240, and the main body portion 320 of the front portion 310 is attached. Is arranged on the outside (front side) of the front surface portion 210, so that the length of the main body portion 352 in the front-rear direction is slightly longer than the length of the side surface portions 320 and 330 in the front-rear direction. In the closed state, the upper surface side of the main body portion 203 is closed (that is, covered) by the upper surface portion 350. The polygonal line C31a and the polygonal line C32 are linear and parallel to each other.

また、突状部354と突状部356は、本体部352の左側面側の辺部に沿って形成され、突状部354と突状部356は、前後方向の間隔を介して形成されている。突状部354は、突状部154と同一の構成であり、突状部356は、突状部156と同一の構成であるので、詳しい説明を省略する。なお、突状部354、356の基端から先端までの長さは、副体部301を閉状態にした際、突状部354、356の下面が側面部320の上辺の上側にあって該上辺に接する長さとなっている。具体的には、突状部354、356の先端が、側面部320の外側の面よりも左側面側に若干突出する長さとなっている。なお、上面部350の撓み具合によっては、突状部354、356の内側の面の一部のみが側面部220の上辺に接し、突状部354、356の内側の面における他の部分は側面部220の上辺の上方に位置する場合もあり、また、上面部350の撓み具合によっては、副体部301を閉状態で静置した場合には、突状部354、356が側面部220の上辺に接触せずに側面部220の上辺の上方に位置する場合もあるが(この場合でも、上方から上面部350を押さえることにより、側面部220の上辺に接触する)、いずれにしても突状部354、356が側面部20の上辺の上側にある。つまり、突状部354、356の内側の面が側面部220の上辺の上側にあるためには、突状部354、356の先端が、左右方向において側面部220の内側の面よりも左側面側(つまり、外側)であればよい。突状部354と突状部356は、同大同形状に形成されている。 Further, the protruding portion 354 and the protruding portion 356 are formed along the side portion on the left side surface side of the main body portion 352, and the protruding portion 354 and the protruding portion 356 are formed via an interval in the front-rear direction. There is. Since the protruding portion 354 has the same configuration as the protruding portion 154 and the protruding portion 356 has the same configuration as the protruding portion 156, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The length from the base end to the tip of the protruding portions 354 and 356 is such that the lower surface of the protruding portions 354 and 356 is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 320 when the accessory portion 301 is closed. It is the length that touches the upper side. Specifically, the tip of the protruding portion 354, 356 has a length slightly protruding toward the left side surface side from the outer surface of the side surface portion 320. Depending on the degree of bending of the upper surface portion 350, only a part of the inner surface of the protruding portion 354 and 356 is in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 220, and the other portion on the inner surface of the protruding portion 354 and 356 is the side surface. It may be located above the upper side of the portion 220, and depending on the degree of bending of the upper surface portion 350, when the sub-body portion 301 is allowed to stand in the closed state, the protruding portions 354 and 356 may be located on the side surface portion 220. It may be located above the upper side of the side surface 220 without touching the upper side (even in this case, by pressing the upper surface 350 from above, it contacts the upper side of the side surface 220), but in any case, it is a protrusion. The shaped portions 354 and 356 are on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 20. That is, in order for the inner surface of the protruding portions 354 and 356 to be on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 220, the tip of the protruding portions 354 and 356 is the left side surface of the inner surface of the side surface portion 220 in the left-right direction. It may be on the side (that is, the outside). The protruding portion 354 and the protruding portion 356 are formed in the same shape.

また、突状部358は、本体部352の右側面側の辺部に沿って形成されている。突状部358は、突状部158と同一の構成であるので、詳しい説明を省略する。なお、突状部358の基端から先端までの長さは、副体部301を閉状態にした際、突状部158の内側の下面が側面部230の上辺の上側にあって該上辺に接する長さとなっている。具体的には、突状部358の先端が、側面部330の外側の面よりも右側面側に若干突出する長さとなっている。なお、上面部350の撓み具合によっては、突状部358の内側の面の一部のみが側面部230の上辺に接し、突状部358の内側の面における他の部分は側面部230の上辺の上方に位置する場合もあり、また、上面部350の撓み具合によっては、副体部301を閉状態で静置した場合には、突状部358が側面部230の上辺に接触せずに側面部230の上辺の上方に位置する場合もあるが(この場合でも、上方から上面部350を押さえることにより、側面部230の上辺に接触する)、いずれにしても突状部158が側面部30の上辺の上側にある。つまり、突状部358の内側の面が側面部230の上辺の上側にあるためには、突状部358の先端が、左右方向において側面部230の内側の面よりも右側面側(つまり、外側)であればよい。 Further, the protruding portion 358 is formed along the side portion on the right side surface side of the main body portion 352. Since the protruding portion 358 has the same configuration as the protruding portion 158, detailed description thereof will be omitted. The length from the base end to the tip of the protruding portion 358 is such that when the sub-body portion 301 is closed, the inner lower surface of the protruding portion 158 is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 230. It is the length to touch. Specifically, the tip of the protruding portion 358 has a length that slightly protrudes toward the right side surface from the outer surface of the side surface portion 330. Depending on the degree of bending of the upper surface portion 350, only a part of the inner surface of the protruding portion 358 is in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 230, and the other portion of the inner surface of the protruding portion 358 is the upper side of the side surface portion 230. Also, depending on the degree of bending of the upper surface portion 350, when the sub-body portion 301 is allowed to stand in the closed state, the protruding portion 358 does not come into contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 230. Although it may be located above the upper side of the side surface portion 230 (even in this case, by pressing the upper surface portion 350 from above, it comes into contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 230), in any case, the protruding portion 158 is a side surface portion. It is above the upper side of 30. That is, in order for the inner surface of the projecting portion 358 to be on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 230, the tip of the projecting portion 358 is on the right side surface side (that is,) of the inner surface of the side surface portion 230 in the left-right direction. It may be outside).

また、突状部358は、本体部352の右側面側の辺部の正面側の端部近傍から背面側の端部近傍にまで形成されている。このように、突状部354、356、358が設けられていることにより、副体部301が閉状態において、上面部350に対して上方から力が加わっても、突状部354、356、358により側面部320と側面部330間に上面部350を支えるので、上面部350が本体部203の収納空間内に沈み込むことがない。また、突状部358は、本体部352の右側面側の辺部の正面側の端部近傍から背面側の端部近傍にまで形成されているので、副体部301を閉状態にした際に、側面部330の上辺の内側には上方に開口した隙間が形成されず、ゴミや埃が入るのを防止することができる。なお、突状部358は、本体部352の右側面側の辺部の正面側の端部近傍から背面側の端部近傍にまで形成されているとしたが、「正面側の端部近傍」の代わりに「正面側の端部」としてもよく、「背面側の端部近傍」の代わりに「背面側の端部」としてもよい。 Further, the protruding portion 358 is formed from the vicinity of the front end portion of the side portion on the right side surface side of the main body portion 352 to the vicinity of the back surface side end portion. As described above, by providing the protruding portions 354, 356, and 358, even if a force is applied to the upper surface portion 350 from above in the closed state of the auxiliary body portion 301, the protruding portions 354, 356, Since the upper surface portion 350 is supported between the side surface portion 320 and the side surface portion 330 by the 358, the upper surface portion 350 does not sink into the storage space of the main body portion 203. Further, since the protruding portion 358 is formed from the vicinity of the front end portion of the side portion on the right side surface side of the main body portion 352 to the vicinity of the rear end side end portion, when the sub-body portion 301 is closed. In addition, a gap opened upward is not formed inside the upper side of the side surface portion 330, and it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering. It is said that the protruding portion 358 is formed from the vicinity of the front end of the right side side of the main body 352 to the vicinity of the back end, but "near the front end". It may be "the end on the front side" instead of "the end on the back side", and it may be "the end on the back side" instead of "near the end on the back side".

また、フラップ360は、上面部350(具体的には、上面部350の本体部352)の左側面側の辺部から折れ線C33−1、C33−2、C33−3を介して連設され、略台形形状に形成されている。フラップ360は、実施例1のフレーム160と同一の構成であるので、詳しい説明を省略する。 Further, the flap 360 is continuously provided from the side portion on the left side surface side of the upper surface portion 350 (specifically, the main body portion 352 of the upper surface portion 350) via the polygonal lines C33-1, C33-2, and C33-3. It is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape. Since the flap 360 has the same configuration as the frame 160 of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

上面部350の左側面側においては、フラップ360が連設されているとともに、フラップ360が連設されていない箇所には、突状部354、356が設けられているので、副体部301を閉状態にした際に、側面部320の上辺の内側には上方に開口した隙間が形成されず、ゴミや埃が入るのを防止することができる。 On the left side of the upper surface portion 350, the flaps 360 are continuously provided, and in the places where the flaps 360 are not connected, the protruding portions 354 and 356 are provided, so that the sub-body portion 301 is provided. When the side surface portion 320 is in the closed state, a gap opened upward is not formed inside the upper side of the side surface portion 320, and it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering.

なお、副体部301を閉状態にした際には、差込み片322が被差込み部212に対して正面部210の外側から差し込まれ、フラップ360が、側面部220の内側に側面部220の内側の面に沿って配置され、上面部350は、本体部203の上面をカバーした状態となり、上面部350は、側面部220、230の上辺に沿った状態となり、底面部250(特に、スリーブ状部205の下辺により囲まれた平面(折れ線C26〜C29により囲まれた平面))に対して平行(略平行としてもよい)となる。また、副体部301を閉状態にした際には、上面部350は、背面部340に対して直角(略直角としてもよい)となり、正面部310(特に、本体部320)とフラップ360は、上面部350に対して直角(略直角としてもよい)となる。 When the sub-body portion 301 is closed, the insertion piece 322 is inserted into the insertion portion 212 from the outside of the front portion 210, and the flap 360 is inside the side surface portion 220 and inside the side surface portion 220. The upper surface portion 350 is in a state of covering the upper surface of the main body portion 203, and the upper surface portion 350 is in a state of being along the upper sides of the side surface portions 220 and 230, and the bottom surface portion 250 (particularly, sleeve-shaped) is arranged. It is parallel (may be substantially parallel) to the plane surrounded by the lower side of the portion 205 (the plane surrounded by the polygonal lines C26 to C29). Further, when the sub-body portion 301 is closed, the upper surface portion 350 is at a right angle to the back surface portion 340 (may be a substantially right angle), and the front portion 310 (particularly, the main body portion 320) and the flap 360 are formed. , Right angle with respect to the upper surface portion 350 (may be substantially right angle).

また、フラップ360は、上面部350の左側面側からは連設されているものの、上面部350の右側面側には連設されていないが、その理由は、実施例1の場合と同様である。 Further, although the flap 360 is continuously connected from the left side surface side of the upper surface portion 350, it is not continuously connected to the right side surface side of the upper surface portion 350, but the reason is the same as in the case of the first embodiment. be.

なお、本体部203と副体部301は、分離部244の箇所で互いに接着されている。つまり、分離部244の外側の面と背面部340の内側の面とが接着剤その他の接着手段により接着されることにより、包装箱201が全体に一体に形成される。つまり、分離部244の外側の面の全部又は一部の領域と背面部340の内側の面の一部の領域の間には接着剤層(図示せず)が設けられている。該接着剤層の接着力は、背面部340を外側に引っ張った場合に、切目線K244が破れて分離部244が本体部203から分離し、分離部244が、背面部340に接着した状態で背面部340に従動するような接着力である。 The main body portion 203 and the sub-body portion 301 are adhered to each other at the separation portion 244. That is, the outer surface of the separation portion 244 and the inner surface of the back surface portion 340 are adhered to each other by an adhesive or other adhesive means, so that the packaging box 201 is integrally formed as a whole. That is, an adhesive layer (not shown) is provided between all or a part of the outer surface of the separation portion 244 and a part of the inner surface of the back surface portion 340. The adhesive strength of the adhesive layer is such that when the back surface portion 340 is pulled outward, the cut line K244 is broken, the separation portion 244 is separated from the main body portion 203, and the separation portion 244 is adhered to the back surface portion 340. The adhesive force is such that it follows the back surface portion 340.

なお、本体部203及び副体部301において、各折れ線の箇所には、予め罫線が形成されている。特に、折れ線C21、C22、C23、C24、C26、C27、C28、C29においては、本体部203の内側の面から押圧した押罫であり、折れ線C31a、C31b、C32、C33−1、C33−2、C33−3においては、副体部301の内側の面から押圧した押罫となっている。底面部250における折れ線270−1、280−1は、上面側から見て山折りとなるので、外側の面から押圧した押罫とするのが好ましい。 In the main body portion 203 and the sub-body portion 301, a ruled line is formed in advance at each polygonal line. In particular, in the broken lines C21, C22, C23, C24, C26, C27, C28, and C29, the ruled lines are pressed from the inner surface of the main body 203, and the broken lines C31a, C31b, C32, C33-1, and C33-2. , C33-3 is a ruled line pressed from the inner surface of the sub-body portion 301. Since the polygonal lines 700-1 and 280-1 on the bottom surface portion 250 are mountain-folded when viewed from the upper surface side, it is preferable to use a ruled line pressed from the outer surface.

また、本体部203と副体部301が接着された状態では、背面部240の上辺240Ta、240Tbと折れ線C32とが高さ方向に略一致(一致としてもよい)した状態となっており、厳密には、折れ線C32が上辺240Ta、240Tbよりも若干上側となっている。これにより、上面部350により本体部203の上面を閉じた際に、突状部354、356が側面部220の上辺に接するとともに突状部358が側面部230の上辺に接し、上面部350と側面部220、230の上辺との間の隙間が形成されるのを防止することができる。 Further, in the state where the main body portion 203 and the sub-body portion 301 are adhered to each other, the upper sides 240Ta and 240Tb of the back surface portion 240 and the polygonal line C32 are substantially aligned (may be matched) in the height direction. The polygonal line C32 is slightly above the upper sides 240Ta and 240Tb. As a result, when the upper surface of the main body 203 is closed by the upper surface portion 350, the protruding portions 354 and 356 are in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 220 and the protruding portion 358 is in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 230. It is possible to prevent the formation of a gap between the upper sides of the side surface portions 220 and 230.

また、本体部203と副体部301が接着された状態では、背面部340の下端と背面部240の下端が一致(略一致としてもよい)している。 Further, in a state where the main body portion 203 and the sub-body portion 301 are adhered to each other, the lower end of the back surface portion 340 and the lower end of the back surface portion 240 are aligned (may be substantially the same).

上記構成の包装箱201の製造工程は、実施例1の包装箱1の製造工程と略同様であるが、糊代部249が正面部210の内側に接着されるため、側面部230を折り返した後に正面部210を折り返す点が異なる。 The manufacturing process of the packaging box 201 having the above configuration is substantially the same as the manufacturing process of the packaging box 1 of the first embodiment, but since the glue margin portion 249 is adhered to the inside of the front portion 210, the side surface portion 230 is folded back. The difference is that the front portion 210 is folded back later.

すなわち、まず、展開状態の本体部203と副体部301とを製造する。次に、副体部301の内側の面に本体部203の外側の面を接着させる(第1接着工程)。つまり、展開状態の副体部301の内側の面を上側にして、背面部340における分離部244との接着領域に接着剤を塗布して、展開状態の本体部203を図31に示すように重ねる。これにより、分離部244と背面部340が接着される(第1接着工程)。その際、背面部240の下辺と背面部340の下辺とが一致する(略一致するとしてもよい)ようにする。なお、分離部244の外側の面の領域に接着剤を塗布して、分離部244を背面部340に接着させてもよい。 That is, first, the main body portion 203 and the sub-body portion 301 in the expanded state are manufactured. Next, the outer surface of the main body portion 203 is adhered to the inner surface of the sub-body portion 301 (first bonding step). That is, with the inner surface of the sub-body portion 301 in the unfolded state facing upward, the adhesive is applied to the adhesive region with the separated portion 244 in the back surface portion 340, and the main body portion 203 in the unfolded state is shown in FIG. 31. Stack. As a result, the separation portion 244 and the back surface portion 340 are bonded (first bonding step). At that time, the lower side of the back surface portion 240 and the lower side of the back surface portion 340 are made to match (may be substantially the same). An adhesive may be applied to the region of the outer surface of the separation portion 244 to adhere the separation portion 244 to the back surface portion 340.

次に、本体部203の底面部250を構成する各部をスリーブ状部205に対して内側に折り返し、さらに、第2片部270の先端部274を本体部272に対して外側に折り返すとともに、第3片部280の先端部284を本体部282に対して外側に折り返して、図32に示す状態とする(折り返し工程)。つまり、第1片部260を折れ線C26を介して正面部210側に折り返し、第2片部270を折れ線C27を介して側面部220側に折り返し、第3片部280を折れ線C29を介して側面部230側に折り返し、第4片部290を折れ線C28を介して背面部240側に折り返し、さらに、先端部274を本体部272に対して折り返すとともに、先端部284を本体部282に対して折り返して、図32に示す状態とする。 Next, each portion constituting the bottom surface portion 250 of the main body portion 203 is folded inward with respect to the sleeve-shaped portion 205, and the tip portion 274 of the second piece portion 270 is folded outward with respect to the main body portion 272. 3 The tip portion 284 of the piece portion 280 is folded outward with respect to the main body portion 282 to bring about the state shown in FIG. 32 (folding step). That is, the first piece 260 is folded back toward the front portion 210 via the polygonal line C26, the second piece 270 is folded back toward the side surface 220 via the polygonal line C27, and the third piece 280 is folded back toward the side surface via the polygonal line C29. The fourth piece 290 is folded back to the back surface 240 side via the polygonal line C28, the tip portion 274 is folded back to the main body portion 272, and the tip portion 284 is folded back to the main body portion 282. The state shown in FIG. 32 is assumed.

次に、先端部284の領域に接着剤を塗布して(接着剤塗布工程)、側面部230を折れ線C23を介して背面部240の側に内側に折り返す(第2折り返し工程)ことにより、先端部284が第4片部290に接着される(第2接着工程)。なお、先端部284の代わりに、第4片部290における先端部284との接着領域に接着剤を塗布してもよい。 Next, an adhesive is applied to the region of the tip portion 284 (adhesive application step), and the side surface portion 230 is folded inward toward the back surface portion 240 via the folding line C23 (second folding step). The portion 284 is bonded to the fourth piece portion 290 (second bonding step). Instead of the tip portion 284, an adhesive may be applied to the adhesive region of the fourth piece portion 290 with the tip portion 284.

次に、先端部274の領域と、糊代部249の領域に接着剤を塗布して(接着剤塗布工程)、正面部210を折れ線C21を介して側面部220の側に内側に折り返すことにより、図33に示す状態とする。すると、先端部274と第1片部260が接着され、糊代部249が正面部210の内側の面に接着される(第3接着工程)。なお、糊代部249の代わりに、正面部210における糊代部249との接着領域に接着剤を塗布してもよく、また、先端部274の代わりに、第1片部260における先端部274との接着領域に接着剤を塗布してもよい。以上のようにして、包装箱201が製造される。なお、上記の製造は、組立て装置により自動で製造される。以上のように、第1接着工程〜第3接着工程により包装箱201を製造できるので、容易に包装箱201を製造することができる。なお、糊代部249を正面部210の外側の面に接着する場合には、先端部274に接着剤を塗布した状態で正面部210を折り返し、その後に、先端部284と糊代部249に接着剤を塗布した状態で側面部230を折り返すことになる。 Next, an adhesive is applied to the region of the tip portion 274 and the region of the glue margin portion 249 (adhesive application step), and the front portion 210 is folded inward toward the side surface portion 220 via the polygonal line C21. , The state shown in FIG. 33. Then, the tip portion 274 and the first piece portion 260 are bonded, and the glue margin portion 249 is bonded to the inner surface of the front surface portion 210 (third bonding step). Instead of the glue margin portion 249, an adhesive may be applied to the adhesive region of the front surface portion 210 with the glue margin portion 249, and instead of the tip portion 274, the tip portion 274 in the first piece portion 260 may be applied. An adhesive may be applied to the area to be adhered to. As described above, the packaging box 201 is manufactured. The above manufacturing is automatically manufactured by the assembly device. As described above, since the packaging box 201 can be manufactured by the first bonding step to the third bonding step, the packaging box 201 can be easily manufactured. When the glue margin portion 249 is adhered to the outer surface of the front portion 210, the front portion 210 is folded back with the adhesive applied to the tip portion 274, and then the tip portion 284 and the glue margin portion 249 are attached. The side surface portion 230 will be folded back with the adhesive applied.

なお、本体部203と副体部301とを接着した際に、本体部203と副体部301の相対位置が正しいか否かは、上記実施例1の場合と同様に、位置合わせ確認用の切込みにより確認することができる。位置合わせ確認の方法は、実施例1の場合と同様であるので、詳しい説明を省略する。 When the main body portion 203 and the sub-body portion 301 are adhered to each other, whether or not the relative positions of the main body portion 203 and the sub-body portion 301 are correct is checked for alignment, as in the case of the first embodiment. It can be confirmed by the notch. Since the method of confirming the alignment is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

なお、上記の製造工程において、第2片部270を側面部220側に折り返し、第1片部260を正面部210側に折り返し、さらに、先端部274を本体部272に対して折り返す工程は、側面部230を背面部240側に折り返して、先端部284を第4片部290に接着した後で、先端部274の領域と、糊代部249の領域に接着剤を塗布する前に行ってもよい。その場合、上記折返し工程では、第3片部280と第4片部290を折り返して、先端部284を折り返し、その後、先端部284に接着剤を塗布することになる。 In the above manufacturing process, the step of folding the second piece 270 to the side surface 220 side, folding the first piece 260 to the front surface 210 side, and further folding the tip 274 to the main body 272 is After folding the side surface portion 230 toward the back surface portion 240 and adhering the tip portion 284 to the fourth piece portion 290, the process is performed before applying the adhesive to the region of the tip portion 274 and the region of the glue margin portion 249. May be good. In that case, in the folding step, the third piece portion 280 and the fourth piece portion 290 are folded back, the tip portion 284 is folded back, and then the adhesive is applied to the tip portion 284.

また、先端部274への接着剤の塗布は、第2片部270を折り返し先端部274を折り返した状態で行うとしたが、第2片部270を側面部220に対して折り返す前の状態で、先端部274(又は第1片部260)に接着剤を塗布した後に、第2片部270を折り返しながら先端部274を折り返すようにしてもよい。なお、先端部274への接着剤の塗布は、先端部284と第4片部290と接着した後で行ってもよい。 Further, the adhesive is applied to the tip portion 274 in a state where the second piece portion 270 is folded back and the tip portion 274 is folded back, but the second piece portion 270 is in a state before being folded back with respect to the side surface portion 220. After applying the adhesive to the tip portion 274 (or the first piece portion 260), the tip portion 274 may be folded back while folding back the second piece portion 270. The adhesive may be applied to the tip portion 274 after being adhered to the tip portion 284 and the fourth piece portion 290.

また、先端部284への接着剤の塗布は、第3片部280を折り返し先端部284を折り返した状態で行うとしたが、第3片部280を側面部230に対して折り返す前の状態で、先端部284(又は第4片部290)に接着剤を塗布した後に、第3片部280を折り返しながら先端部284を折り返すようにしてもよい。 Further, the adhesive is applied to the tip portion 284 in a state where the third piece portion 280 is folded back and the tip portion 284 is folded back, but the third piece portion 280 is in a state before being folded back with respect to the side surface portion 230. After applying the adhesive to the tip portion 284 (or the fourth piece portion 290), the tip portion 284 may be folded back while folding back the third piece portion 280.

上記構成の包装箱201の使用方法について説明する。包装箱201を使用しない状態では、包装箱201は図34に示すように平板状に折り畳むことができるので、折り畳んで保管しておく。 A method of using the packaging box 201 having the above configuration will be described. When the packaging box 201 is not used, the packaging box 201 can be folded into a flat plate shape as shown in FIG. 34, so that the packaging box 201 is folded and stored.

次に、包装箱201を使用する際に、包装箱201を組み立てる。すなわち、本体部203における正面部210と背面部240が互いに平行になり、側面部220と側面部230が互いに平行になるようにし、底面部250をスリーブ状部205に対して直角となるように組み立てることにより、包装箱201が、図27、図28に示すように組み立てられる。 Next, when using the packaging box 201, the packaging box 201 is assembled. That is, the front surface portion 210 and the back surface portion 240 of the main body portion 203 are parallel to each other, the side surface portions 220 and the side surface portions 230 are parallel to each other, and the bottom surface portion 250 is perpendicular to the sleeve-shaped portion 205. By assembling, the packaging box 201 is assembled as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28.

そして、図35に示すように、本体部203に被収納物(商品)Gを収納する。なお、図34の状態から本体部203を組み立てた場合には、図27、図28に示すように、上面部350や正面部310は上方に伸びた状態となっていて、本体部203の上方が開口した状態になっているので、被収納物Gをそのまま本体部203の上方から収納すればよい。なお、被収納物が柔らかいものであれば、正面部210や側面部220と被収納物との間に隙間を設けなくても、側面部220の差込みに支障はないが、被収納物Gが図35に示すような箱状等の硬いものである場合には、側面部220と被収納物との間に隙間を設けておく。また、正面部310についても、差込み片322が正面部210の内側に向けて差し込まれるので、被収納物Gが硬いものである場合には、正面部210と被収納物との間に隙間を設けておく。 Then, as shown in FIG. 35, the stored object (product) G is stored in the main body portion 203. When the main body 203 is assembled from the state of FIG. 34, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the upper surface portion 350 and the front surface portion 310 are in a state of extending upward and above the main body portion 203. Is in an open state, the stored object G may be stored as it is from above the main body portion 203. If the stored object is soft, there is no problem in inserting the side surface portion 220 even if a gap is not provided between the front portion 210 or the side surface portion 220 and the stored object, but the stored object G is used. In the case of a hard object such as a box as shown in FIG. 35, a gap is provided between the side surface portion 220 and the stored object. Further, also in the front portion 310, since the insertion piece 322 is inserted toward the inside of the front portion 210, if the stored object G is hard, a gap is provided between the front portion 210 and the stored object. I will set it up.

被収納物Gを収納したら、副体部301を閉状態にして被収納物を包装する。すなわち、上面部350を正面側に回動させるとともに、フラップ360を上面部350に対して折り曲げた状態として本体部203内に挿入し(つまり、フラップ360が側面部220の内側となるようにする)、正面部310を上面部350に対して折り曲げた状態として差込み片322を被差込み部212に対して外側から差し込んで、図36〜図38に示す状態にする。つまり、フラップ360が側面部220の内側となるようにするとともに、差込み片322を被差込み部212に差し込むことにより、本体部203の上面側を上面部350により閉じた状態とする。差込み片322を被差込み部212に差し込むには、差込み片322により片部218を押し込みながら、差込み片322を開口部214に挿入する。差込み片322を被差込み部212に差し込むことにより、差込み状態となる。 After storing the stored object G, the accessory portion 301 is closed and the stored object is packaged. That is, the upper surface portion 350 is rotated toward the front side, and the flap 360 is inserted into the main body portion 203 in a state of being bent with respect to the upper surface portion 350 (that is, the flap 360 is inside the side surface portion 220). ), The insertion piece 322 is inserted into the insertion portion 212 from the outside with the front portion 310 bent with respect to the upper surface portion 350, so that the state shown in FIGS. 36 to 38 is obtained. That is, the flap 360 is set to be inside the side surface portion 220, and the insertion piece 322 is inserted into the insertion portion 212 so that the upper surface side of the main body portion 203 is closed by the upper surface portion 350. To insert the insertion piece 322 into the insertion portion 212, the insertion piece 322 is inserted into the opening 214 while pushing the piece portion 218 with the insertion piece 322. By inserting the insertion piece 322 into the insertion portion 212, the insertion state is established.

なお、副体部301を閉状態にした際には、上面部350が本体部203の上面をカバーし、突状部354、356の下面が側面部220の上辺に接し、さらに、突状部358の下面が側面部230の上辺に接する。また、本体部320は正面部210と平行で正面部210の外側の面に沿った状態となる。 When the sub-body portion 301 is closed, the upper surface portion 350 covers the upper surface of the main body portion 203, the lower surface of the protruding portions 354 and 356 is in contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 220, and further, the protruding portion. The lower surface of the 358 touches the upper side of the side surface portion 230. Further, the main body portion 320 is in a state parallel to the front portion 210 and along the outer surface of the front portion 210.

以上のようにして、被収納物Gを包装箱201に包装したら、包装箱201を被収納物Gを陳列する場所に搬送する。 After the packaged object G is packaged in the packaging box 201 as described above, the packaging box 201 is transported to the place where the packaged object G is displayed.

その後、被収納物を陳列する場合には、切目線K244を破断して、副体部301を本体部203から分離する。すなわち、差込み片322を被差込み部212から抜いて(引き出しとしてもよい)差込み状態を解除し、その後、切目線K244を破断する。差込み片322を被差込み部212から抜く際には、例えば、正面部310の本体部320の下端に指を引っ掛けて本体部320を上方に引っ張り、また、切目線K244の破断に際しては、例えば、正面部310の本体部320を手でもった状態で本体部320を外側に引っ張ることにより、切目線K244を上端から下方に向けて破断する。なお、上面部350を背面部340の外側に開いた状態で、分離部244の上端領域の内側の面に手を接触させた状態で分離部244を外側に引っ張ることにより、切目線K244を破断してもよい。なお、被収納物Gが収納されている関係で分離部244の内側の面に手を接触させることができない場合には、正面部310の本体部320や上面部350を手で持って背面側に引っ張ることにより切目線K244を破断するのが好ましい。 After that, when displaying the items to be stored, the cut line K244 is broken to separate the sub-body portion 301 from the main body portion 203. That is, the insertion piece 322 is pulled out from the insertion portion 212 (may be a drawer) to release the insertion state, and then the cut line K244 is broken. When the insertion piece 322 is pulled out from the insertion portion 212, for example, a finger is hooked on the lower end of the main body portion 320 of the front portion 310 to pull the main body portion 320 upward, and when the cut line K244 is broken, for example, for example. By pulling the main body 320 outward while holding the main body 320 of the front portion 310 by hand, the cut line K244 is broken downward from the upper end. The cut line K244 is broken by pulling the separation portion 244 outward while the upper surface portion 350 is open to the outside of the back surface portion 340 and the separation portion 244 is in contact with the inner surface of the upper end region of the separation portion 244. You may. If the inner surface of the separation portion 244 cannot be brought into contact with the inner surface of the separation portion 244 due to the storage of the stored object G, the main body portion 320 or the upper surface portion 350 of the front portion 310 is held by hand on the back side. It is preferable to break the cut line K244 by pulling to.

そして、副体部301(厳密には、分離部244が接着された副体部301)を取り除くことにより、図39、図40に示す状態となるので、背面部240の側を陳列における正面側として、被収納物Gを陳列する。つまり、分離部244が分離されたことにより、背面部240には、切欠部(切欠部K240と分離部244が除かれたことによる切欠部とを合わせた切欠部)K249が形成されるので、この切欠部K249を介して被収納物を視認することができる。 Then, by removing the sub-body portion 301 (strictly speaking, the sub-body portion 301 to which the separation portion 244 is adhered), the state shown in FIGS. 39 and 40 is obtained. Therefore, the side of the back surface portion 240 is the front side in the display. As a result, the stored object G is displayed. That is, since the separation portion 244 is separated, a notch portion (a notch portion including the notch portion K240 and the notch portion due to the removal of the separation portion 244) K249 is formed on the back surface portion 240. The stored object can be visually recognized through the notch K249.

なお、被差込み部212から差込み片322を抜いたら、正面部310の本体部320を手でもって上面部350を上方に回動させ、そのまま本体部320を背面側に引っ張ることにより切目線K244を破断できるので、差込み片322の抜き操作(引き出しとしてもよい)と切目線K244の破断を1つの一連の動作で行なうことができる。 After removing the insertion piece 322 from the insertion portion 212, the upper surface portion 350 is rotated upward by hand with the main body portion 320 of the front portion 310, and the main body portion 320 is pulled toward the back side as it is to form the cut line K244. Since it can be broken, the insertion piece 322 can be pulled out (may be pulled out) and the cut line K244 can be broken by one series of operations.

以上のように、本実施例の包装箱201によれば、切目線K244を破断して分離部244のみを分離すればよいので、副体部301(包装箱201の一部)を取り除く作業を容易に行うことができ、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行なうことができ、特に、差込み片322の抜き操作と切目線K244を破断することによる分離部244の分離を一連の作業で行なうことができるので、被収納物の陳列作業を容易に行うことができる。 As described above, according to the packaging box 201 of the present embodiment, since it is only necessary to break the cut line K244 and separate only the separation portion 244, the work of removing the sub-body portion 301 (a part of the packaging box 201) is performed. It can be easily performed, and the display work of the items to be stored can be easily performed. In particular, the operation of pulling out the insertion piece 322 and the separation of the separation portion 244 by breaking the cut line K244 can be performed in a series of operations. Therefore, the display work of the items to be stored can be easily performed.

副体部301を閉状態にした際には、上面部350が本体部203の上面をカバーし、突状部354、356の下面が側面部220の上辺の上側にあり、さらに、突状部358の下面が側面部230の上辺の上側にあるので、包装箱201の強度を高く維持することができる。また、正面部310においても、差込み片320が被差込み部212に差し込まれた状態では、本体部320は差込み片320に支持され、本体部320の下端が被差込み部212よりも下方に行くことがないので、正面部310によっても上面部350を支えており、副体部301の閉状態における包装箱201の強度を高く維持することができ、例えば、上面部350に対して上から力が加わっても、上面部350が下方に沈み込むのを防止することができる。 When the sub-body portion 301 is closed, the upper surface portion 350 covers the upper surface of the main body portion 203, the lower surface of the protruding portions 354 and 356 is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 220, and further, the protruding portion Since the lower surface of the 358 is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 230, the strength of the packaging box 201 can be maintained high. Further, also in the front portion 310, when the insertion piece 320 is inserted into the insertion portion 212, the main body portion 320 is supported by the insertion piece 320, and the lower end of the main body portion 320 goes below the insertion portion 212. Since there is no front portion 310, the upper surface portion 350 is also supported, and the strength of the packaging box 201 in the closed state of the accessory portion 301 can be maintained high. For example, a force is applied to the upper surface portion 350 from above. Even if it is added, it is possible to prevent the upper surface portion 350 from sinking downward.

また、実施例1の場合と同様に、本体部203と副体部301は、展開状態において略方形状を呈するので、ブランクの面積を有効活用できる。つまり、本実施例の包装箱201の2つ分をシート状のブランクから形成する場合に、図41に示すように、領域R101の面積があればよい。 Further, as in the case of the first embodiment, since the main body portion 203 and the sub-body portion 301 have a substantially rectangular shape in the expanded state, the blank area can be effectively utilized. That is, when two packaging boxes 201 of this embodiment are formed from sheet-shaped blanks, the area of the region R101 may be sufficient as shown in FIG. 41.

一方、仮に、本体部203と副体部301を一体にしたものに近似した包装箱1101の2つを1つのブランクで形成しようとすると、図42に示す構成となり、領域R111の面積が必要になってしまい、図42のハッチングに示す2つの領域が無駄になってしまうことから、領域R101の面積を領域R111の面積よりも小さくできる。 On the other hand, if it is attempted to form two packaging boxes 1101 that are similar to the one in which the main body portion 203 and the sub-body portion 301 are integrated with one blank, the configuration shown in FIG. 42 is obtained, and the area of the region R111 is required. Since the two regions shown in the hatching in FIG. 42 are wasted, the area of the region R101 can be made smaller than the area of the region R111.

なお、図42に示す包装箱1101においては、背面部240’から切目線K240’を介して上面部350が連設されており、背面部240’には、包装箱201と異なり、分離部は設けられていない。被収納物を陳列する場合には、切目線K240’を破断して、上面部350と正面部310とフラップ360を取り除くことになる。この包装箱1101においては、背面部240’と上面部350とが切目線K240’により連設されているので、上面部350に上側から力が加わった場合に、切目線K240’が破断しやすく、本実施例の包装箱201よりも強度が弱いと言える。つまり、本実施例の包装箱201では、背面部240と背面部340が重なる構成であるにも関わらず、本体部203と副体部301がともに略方形状を呈するので、ブランクの面積を有効活用でき、さらには、上面部350の辺部に沿って切目線が存在しないので、強度を高めることができるといえる。 In the packaging box 1101 shown in FIG. 42, the upper surface portion 350 is continuously provided from the back surface portion 240'to the cut line K240', and the back surface portion 240'has a separation portion unlike the packaging box 201. Not provided. When displaying the items to be stored, the cut line K240'is broken to remove the upper surface portion 350, the front portion 310, and the flap 360. In this packaging box 1101, since the back surface portion 240'and the upper surface portion 350' are connected to each other by the cut line K240', the cut line K240'is likely to break when a force is applied to the upper surface portion 350 from above. It can be said that the strength is weaker than that of the packaging box 201 of this embodiment. That is, in the packaging box 201 of the present embodiment, although the back surface portion 240 and the back surface portion 340 overlap each other, the main body portion 203 and the sub-body portion 301 both exhibit a substantially rectangular shape, so that the blank area is effective. It can be utilized, and further, since there is no cut line along the side portion of the upper surface portion 350, it can be said that the strength can be increased.

なお、上記の説明において、フラップ360は上面部350の左側面側から連設されているとしたが、副体部301を前後方向の中心面を介して左右対称の構成として、フラップ360を上面部350の右側面側から連設された構成としてもよい。その場合には、本体部303についても、前後方向の中心面を介して左右対称の構成とする。このように、左右対称の構成とする場合には、包装箱の製造に際しては、図31においては、本体部203と副体部301を左右線対称にして(つまり、表裏を逆にして)配置することになる。 In the above description, the flap 360 is connected from the left side surface side of the upper surface portion 350, but the flap 360 is configured so that the accessory portion 301 is symmetrically arranged via the central surface in the front-rear direction, and the flap 360 is on the upper surface. It may be configured to be continuously provided from the right side of the portion 350. In that case, the main body 303 also has a symmetrical configuration via the central surface in the front-rear direction. In this way, in the case of a symmetrical configuration, in the case of manufacturing the packaging box, in FIG. 31, the main body portion 203 and the sub-body portion 301 are arranged symmetrically (that is, the front and back sides are reversed). Will be done.

また、上記の説明では、切目線K244を破断することにより、背面部240には、切欠部K240と一体となった切欠部が形成されるとしたが、背面部240に切目線K244の代わりに無端状(周状としてもよい)の切目線を設けて、この無端状の切目線で囲まれた領域を分離部とし、分離部を分離した状態では、背面部240に開口部形成される構成としてもよい。その場合でも、この開口部を介して被収納物を外部から視認することができる。 Further, in the above description, it is said that by breaking the cut line K244, a notch portion integrated with the notch portion K240 is formed on the back surface portion 240, but instead of the cut line K244 on the back surface portion 240. A configuration in which an endless (or peripheral) cut line is provided, the area surrounded by the endless cut line is used as a separation portion, and when the separation portion is separated, an opening is formed in the back surface portion 240. May be. Even in that case, the stored object can be visually recognized from the outside through this opening.

また、底面部250においては、正面部210から第1片部260が連設され、側面部220から第2片部270が連設されるとしたが、組立て状態における本体部203の左右方向の長さが前後方向の長さよりも長い場合等には、正面部210から第2片部270が連設され、側面部220から第1片部210が連設される構成としてもよい。その場合でも、先端部274は、第2片部270における第1片部260側に形成され、例えば、第1片部260と第2片部270は、本体部203の展開状態において第1片部260と第2片部270間の中心線を介して左右対称となる。同様に、側面部230から第3片部280が連設され、背面部240から第4片部290が連設されるとしたが、側面部230から第4片部290が連設され、背面部240から第3片部280が連設される構成としてもよい。その場合でも、先端部284は、第3片部280における第4片部290側に形成され、例えば、第3片部280と第4片部290は、本体部203の展開状態において第3片部280と第4片部290間の中心線を介して左右線対称となる。 Further, in the bottom surface portion 250, the first piece portion 260 is continuously connected from the front portion 210, and the second piece portion 270 is connected continuously from the side surface portion 220, but the main body portion 203 in the assembled state is connected in the left-right direction. When the length is longer than the length in the front-rear direction, the front portion 210 may be connected to the second piece portion 270, and the side surface portion 220 may be connected to the first piece portion 210. Even in that case, the tip portion 274 is formed on the first piece portion 260 side of the second piece portion 270, and for example, the first piece portion 260 and the second piece portion 270 are the first pieces in the expanded state of the main body portion 203. It becomes symmetrical via the center line between the portion 260 and the second piece portion 270. Similarly, it was said that the third piece 280 was connected from the side surface 230 and the fourth piece 290 was connected from the back surface 240, but the fourth piece 290 was connected from the side surface 230 to the back surface. A configuration may be configured in which the third piece portion 280 is continuously provided from the portion 240. Even in that case, the tip portion 284 is formed on the fourth piece portion 290 side of the third piece portion 280, and for example, the third piece portion 280 and the fourth piece portion 290 are the third piece in the expanded state of the main body portion 203. Left-right line symmetry is achieved via the center line between the portion 280 and the fourth piece portion 290.

また、上記の説明においては、副体部301におけるフラップは上面部150における1つの辺部のみから連設されているとしたが、図43に示すように、上面部350における相対する2つの辺部から連設した構成としてもよい。すなわち、図43に示す副体部301Aにおいては、フラップ360が、上面部350の左側面側の辺部から折れ線C33−1、C33−2、C33−3を介して連設されているとともに、フラップ370が、上面部350の右側面側の辺部から折れ線C34−1、C34−2、C34−3を介して連設されている。 Further, in the above description, it is assumed that the flaps in the sub-body portion 301 are continuously provided from only one side portion in the upper surface portion 150, but as shown in FIG. 43, two opposing sides in the upper surface portion 350 are provided. It may be configured as a series from the department. That is, in the sub-body portion 301A shown in FIG. 43, the flap 360 is continuously provided from the side portion on the left side surface side of the upper surface portion 350 via the polygonal lines C33-1, C33-2, and C33-3. The flap 370 is continuously provided from the side portion on the right side surface side of the upper surface portion 350 via the polygonal lines C34-1, C34-2, and C34-3.

フラップ(第2フラップ)370は、副体部301Aの展開状態において、前後方向の中心線を介してフラップ360と左右対称に形成されている以外は同様の構成である。すなわち、フラップ370は、略台形形状を呈している。副体部301Aを閉状態にした際には、フラップ370は、側面部230の内側に側面部230の内側の面に沿って配置される。 The flap (second flap) 370 has the same configuration except that the flap (second flap) 370 is formed symmetrically with the flap 360 via the center line in the front-rear direction in the deployed state of the accessory portion 301A. That is, the flap 370 has a substantially trapezoidal shape. When the accessory portion 301A is closed, the flap 370 is arranged inside the side surface portion 230 along the inner surface of the side surface portion 230.

また、副体部301Aにおいては、上面部350の右側面側に突状部(第2突状部)355、357が設けられている。突状部355は、副体部301Aの展開状態において、前後方向の中心線を介して突状部354と左右対称に形成されている以外は同様の構成であり、また、突状部357は、副体部301Aの展開状態において、前後方向の中心線を介して突状部356と左右対称に形成されている以外は同様の構成である。突状部355と突状部357は、副体部301Aの展開状態において、上面部350とフラップ370の境界位置に切込みを形成することにより設けられている。 Further, in the sub-body portion 301A, a protruding portion (second protruding portion) 355, 357 is provided on the right side surface side of the upper surface portion 350. The projecting portion 355 has the same configuration as the projecting portion 354 in the deployed state of the subbody portion 301A, except that the projecting portion 354 is formed symmetrically with the projecting portion 354 via the center line in the front-rear direction, and the projecting portion 357 has the same configuration. In the deployed state of the sub-body portion 301A, the configuration is the same except that the sub-body portion 301A is formed symmetrically with the protruding portion 356 via the center line in the front-rear direction. The protruding portion 355 and the protruding portion 357 are provided by forming a notch at the boundary position between the upper surface portion 350 and the flap 370 in the deployed state of the subbody portion 301A.

つまり、突状部355と突状部357は、ともに先端側に行くほど幅狭(つまり、前後方向の長さが短くなる)となる略台形形状に形成され、突状部355、357の基端から先端までの長さは、副体部301Aを閉状態にした際(つまり、副体部301Aの閉状態において、上面部350は、本体部203の上面をカバーしている)、突状部355、357の内側の面(つまり、上面部350が本体部203の上面をカバーした状態では、突状部355、357の下面)が側面部230の上辺の上側にあって該上辺に接する長さとなっている。具体的には、突状部355、357の先端が、側面部230の外側の面よりも右側面側に若干突出する長さとなっている。なお、上面部350の撓み具合によっては、突状部355、357の内側の面の一部のみが側面部230の上辺に接し、突状部355、357の内側の面における他の部分は側面部230の上辺の上方に位置する場合もあり、また、上面部350の撓み具合によっては、副体部301Aを閉状態で静置した場合には、突状部355、357が側面部230の上辺に接触せずに側面部230の上辺の上方に位置する場合もあるが(この場合でも、上方から上面部350を押さえることにより、突状部355、357が側面部230の上辺に接触する)、いずれにしても突状部355、357が側面部230の上辺の上側にある。つまり、突状部355、357の内側の面が側面部230の上辺の上側にあるためには、突状部355、357の先端が、左右方向において側面部230の内側の面よりも右側面側(つまり、外側)であればよい。突状部355と突状部357は、同大同形状に形成されている。 That is, both the protruding portion 355 and the protruding portion 357 are formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape in which the width becomes narrower (that is, the length in the front-rear direction becomes shorter) toward the tip side, and the base of the protruding portions 355 and 357. The length from the end to the tip is convex when the sub-body portion 301A is closed (that is, in the closed state of the sub-body portion 301A, the upper surface portion 350 covers the upper surface of the main body portion 203). The inner surface of the portions 355 and 357 (that is, the lower surface of the protruding portion 355 and 357 when the upper surface portion 350 covers the upper surface of the main body portion 203) is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 230 and is in contact with the upper side. It is the length. Specifically, the tip of the protruding portion 355, 357 has a length that slightly protrudes to the right side surface side from the outer surface of the side surface portion 230. Depending on the degree of bending of the upper surface portion 350, only a part of the inner surface of the protruding portion 355, 357 touches the upper side of the side surface portion 230, and the other portion on the inner surface of the protruding portion 355, 357 is the side surface. It may be located above the upper side of the portion 230, and depending on the degree of bending of the upper surface portion 350, when the auxiliary body portion 301A is allowed to stand in a closed state, the protruding portions 355 and 357 may be located on the side surface portion 230. It may be located above the upper side of the side surface portion 230 without touching the upper side (even in this case, by pressing the upper surface portion 350 from above, the protruding portions 355 and 357 come into contact with the upper side of the side surface portion 230. ), In any case, the protruding portion 355, 357 is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 230. That is, in order for the inner surface of the projecting portion 355, 357 to be on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 230, the tip of the projecting portion 355, 357 is a surface on the right side of the inner surface of the side surface portion 230 in the left-right direction. It may be on the side (that is, the outside). The protruding portion 355 and the protruding portion 357 are formed in the same shape.

副体部301Aによれば、上面部350の右側面側において、フラップ370が連設されているとともに、フラップ370が連設されていない箇所には、突状部355、357が設けられているので、副体部301Aを閉状態にした際に、側面部330の上辺の内側には上方に開口した隙間が形成されず、ゴミや埃が入るのを防止することができる。 According to the sub-body portion 301A, the flaps 370 are continuously provided on the right side surface side of the upper surface portion 350, and the protruding portions 355 and 357 are provided in the places where the flaps 370 are not continuously provided. Therefore, when the sub-body portion 301A is closed, a gap opened upward is not formed inside the upper side of the side surface portion 330, and it is possible to prevent dust and dirt from entering.

また、突状部355、357が設けられているので、副体部301Aを閉状態にした際には、突状部355、357の下面が側面部330の上辺の上側にあるので、副体部301Aの閉状態における包装箱の強度を高く維持することができ、例えば、上面部350に対して上から力が加わっても、上面部350が下方に沈み込むのを防止することができる。 Further, since the projecting portion 355, 357 is provided, when the sub-body portion 301A is closed, the lower surface of the projecting portion 355, 357 is on the upper side of the upper side of the side surface portion 330, so that the sub-body portion is provided. The strength of the packaging box in the closed state of the portion 301A can be maintained high, and for example, even if a force is applied to the upper surface portion 350 from above, the upper surface portion 350 can be prevented from sinking downward.

また、上記の説明において、本体部203の4つの側面はスリーブ状部205により形成されているとしたが、方形状の板状の底面部の各辺から正面部と2つの側面部と背面部とがそれぞれ連設され、正面部と2つの側面部と背面部において隣接する各部が糊代部を介して連設された構成としてもよい。糊代部としては、例えば、2つの側面部において、正面側と背面側とに糊代部が折れ線を介して連設され、正面部と背面部に糊代部が接着された構成とする。このような構成の場合には、正面部と2つの側面部と背面部により側面構成部が構成される。 Further, in the above description, although it is assumed that the four side surfaces of the main body portion 203 are formed by the sleeve-shaped portion 205, the front portion, the two side surface portions, and the back surface portion are formed from each side of the rectangular plate-shaped bottom surface portion. And are connected to each other, and the front part, the two side surface parts, and the back side parts adjacent to each other may be connected to each other via the glue margin part. As the glue margin portion, for example, in the two side surface portions, the glue margin portion is continuously provided on the front side and the back surface side via a broken line, and the glue margin portion is adhered to the front portion and the back surface portion. In the case of such a configuration, the side component portion is configured by the front portion, the two side surface portions, and the back surface portion.

なお、上記の各実施例において、「略円弧状」として説明した部分は「円弧状」としてもよい。 In each of the above embodiments, the portion described as "substantially arcuate" may be "arcular".

1、201 包装箱
3、3A、3B、3C、203 本体部
5、205 スリーブ状部
10、110、210、310 正面部
20、30、220、230 側面部
40、140、240、340 背面部
42、242 本体部
44、244 分離部
49、249 糊代部
50、250 底面部
60、260 第1片部
70 270 第2片部
74、84、274、284 端部領域
80、280 第3片部
90、290 第4片部
93 開口部
101、101A、101B、101C、301、301A 副体部
150、350 上面部
154、155、156、157、158、354、355、356、357、358 突状部
160、170、360、370 フラップ
220 被差込み部
322 差込み片
K10 切欠部
K24、K44、K244 切目線
1,201 Packaging box 3,3A, 3B, 3C, 203 Main body 5,205 Sleeve-shaped part 10,110,210,310 Front part 20,30,220,230 Side part 40,140,240,340 Back part 42 242 Main body 44, 244 Separation 49, 249 Glue margin 50, 250 Bottom 60, 260 First piece 70 270 Second piece 74, 84, 274, 284 End area 80, 280 Third piece 90, 290 4th piece 93 Opening 101, 101A, 101B, 101C, 301, 301A Subbody part 150, 350 Top surface part 154, 155, 156, 157, 158, 354, 355, 356, 357, 358 Projection Part 160, 170, 360, 370 Flap 220 Insertion part 322 Insertion piece K10 Notch K24, K44, K244 Cut line

Claims (17)

包装箱であって、
本体部(3、3A、3B、3C)と副体部(101、101A、101B、101C)とを有し、
本体部と副体部が、ともに、シート状のブランクにより形成され、
本体部が、
底面部(50)と、
底面部の各辺から立設する側面構成部で、本体部正面部(10)と、本体部第1側面部(20)と、本体部第2側面部(30)と、本体部背面部(40)とを有する側面構成部(5)と、を有し、
本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の一方の側が左側面側であり、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の他方の側が右側面側であり、
本体部背面部の一部が分離部(44)として本体部背面部における分離部以外の部分である背面本体部(42)と切目線を介して分離可能に形成され、
副体部が、
副体部正面部(110)と、副体部背面部(140)と、上面部(150)と、フラップ(160)とを有し、
副体部正面部は、上面部の正面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、
フラップは、上面部の本体部第1側面部側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、
副体部背面部は、上面部の背面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、本体部背面部の外側の面に沿って設けられ、分離部の外側の面に接着され、副体部正面部は、本体部正面部と非接着であり、
副体部を閉状態とするには、フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、フラップが本体部第1側面部(20)の内側となるようにするとともに、副体部正面部が上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、副体部正面部が本体部正面部の内側となるようにして、本体部の上面側を上面部により閉じた状態とし、
切目線を破断して分離部を背面部本体部から分離することにより、副体部が包装箱から取り除かれることを特徴とする包装箱。
It ’s a packaging box,
It has a main body portion (3, 3A, 3B, 3C) and a sub body portion (101, 101A, 101B, 101C).
Both the main body and the sub-body are formed by a sheet-shaped blank.
The main body is
Bottom part (50) and
A side component that stands up from each side of the bottom surface, including the front surface of the main body (10), the first side surface of the main body (20), the second side surface of the main body (30), and the back surface of the main body (30). 40) and the side component (5), which has
One side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the left side surface side, and the other side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the right side surface side.
A part of the back surface portion of the main body portion is formed as a separation portion (44) so as to be separable from the back surface main body portion (42) which is a portion other than the separation portion in the back surface portion of the main body portion via a cut line.
The sub-body part
It has a sub-body portion front portion (110), a sub-body portion back surface portion (140), an upper surface portion (150), and a flap (160).
The front part of the sub-body part is continuously provided from the side part on the front side of the upper surface part via a polygonal line.
The flaps are continuously provided from the side portion of the upper surface portion on the side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion via a broken line.
The back surface portion of the sub-body portion is continuously provided from the side portion on the back surface side of the upper surface portion via a broken line, and the back surface portion of the sub-body portion is provided along the outer surface of the back surface portion of the main body portion and is located outside the separation portion. Adhesive to the surface, the front part of the sub-body part is not adhered to the front part of the main body part,
To close the sub-body part, with the flap bent with respect to the upper surface part, make sure that the flap is inside the first side surface part (20) of the main body part, and the front part of the sub-body part is the upper surface part. In a state of being bent with respect to the portion, the front portion of the sub-body portion is inside the front portion of the main body portion, and the upper surface side of the main body portion is closed by the upper surface portion.
A packaging box characterized in that the sub-body portion is removed from the packaging box by breaking the cut line and separating the separation portion from the back portion main body portion.
分離部は、本体部背面部の下辺の一部である下辺部分(44a)と該切目線により囲まれており、
分離部の下端に指を係止した状態で、分離部の下端を外側にひっぱることにより切目線が破断することを特徴とする請求項1に記載の包装箱。
The separation portion is surrounded by a lower side portion (44a), which is a part of the lower side of the back surface portion of the main body portion, and the cut line.
The packaging box according to claim 1, wherein the cut line is broken by pulling the lower end of the separation portion outward with a finger locked to the lower end of the separation portion.
底面部には、該下辺部分における少なくとも一部を辺部とする開口部(93)が形成されていることを特徴とする請求項2に記載の包装箱。 The packaging box according to claim 2, wherein an opening (93) having at least a part of the lower side portion thereof is formed on the bottom surface portion. 本体部正面部には、上方に開口した切欠部(K10)が設けられ、副体部を閉状態にした際には、副体部正面部の少なくとも先端側の辺部(110c)は本体部正面部の背面側に位置することを特徴とする請求項1又は2又は3に記載の包装箱。 A notch (K10) opened upward is provided on the front portion of the main body portion, and when the sub-body portion is closed, at least the side portion (110c) on the tip side of the front portion of the sub-body portion is the main body portion. The packaging box according to claim 1, 2 or 3, characterized in that it is located on the back side of the front portion. 本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部のいずれかである特定側面部には、上方に開口した切欠部を特定側面部に形成するための切目線である切欠部形成用切目線(K24)が形成され、該切欠部形成用切目線を破断することにより特定側面部の上辺と切欠部形成用切目線に沿った辺部により囲まれた切取り部(24)が特定側面部から取り除かれることを特徴とする請求項1又は2又は3に記載の包装箱。 In the specific side surface portion, which is either the first side surface portion of the main body portion or the second side surface portion of the main body portion, a notch portion forming cut line (a cut line for forming a notch portion) which is a cut line for forming an upwardly opened notch portion in the specific side surface portion. K24) is formed, and by breaking the notch forming cut line, the cut portion (24) surrounded by the upper side of the specific side surface portion and the side portion along the notch forming cut line is removed from the specific side surface portion. The packaging box according to claim 1 or 2 or 3, wherein the packaging box is characterized by the above. 副体部を閉状態にした際には、副体部正面部の先端側の辺部が、底面部の上面に接することを特徴とする請求項1又は2又は3又は4又は5に記載の包装箱。 2. Packaging box. 包装箱であって、
本体部(203)と副体部(301、301A)とを有し、
本体部と副体部が、ともに、シート状のブランクにより形成され、
本体部が、
底面部(250)と、
底面部の各辺から立設する側面構成部で、本体部正面部(210)と、本体部第1側面部(220)と、本体部第2側面部(230)と、本体部背面部(240)とを有する側面構成部(205)と、を有し、
本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の一方の側が左側面側であり、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の他方の側が右側面側であり、
本体部背面部の一部が分離部(244)として本体部背面部における分離部以外の部分である背面本体部(242)と切目線を介して分離可能に形成され、
副体部が、
副体部正面部(310)と、副体部背面部(340)と、上面部(350)と、フラップ(360)とを有し、
副体部正面部は、上面部の正面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、
フラップは、上面部の本体部第1側面部側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、
副体部背面部は、上面部の背面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、本体部背面部の外側の面に沿って設けられ、分離部の外側の面に接着され、副体部正面部は、本体部正面部と非接着であり、
副体部正面部には、差込み片(322)が設けられるとともに、本体部正面部には、差込み片を差し込むための被差込み部(212)が設けられ、
副体部を閉状態とするには、フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、フラップが本体部第1側面部(20)の内側となるようにするとともに、差込み片を被差込み部に差し込むことにより、本体部の上面側を上面部により閉じた状態とし、
差込み片を被差込み部から抜くとともに切目線を破断して分離部を背面部本体部から分離することにより、副体部が包装箱から取り除かれることを特徴とする包装箱。
It ’s a packaging box,
It has a main body part (203) and a sub body part (301, 301A).
Both the main body and the sub-body are formed by a sheet-shaped blank.
The main body is
Bottom part (250) and
A side component that stands up from each side of the bottom surface, including the front surface of the main body (210), the first side surface of the main body (220), the second side surface of the main body (230), and the back surface of the main body (. With a side component (205) having 240) and
One side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the left side surface side, and the other side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the right side surface side.
A part of the back surface portion of the main body portion is formed as a separation portion (244) so as to be separable from the back surface main body portion (242) which is a portion other than the separation portion on the back surface portion of the main body portion via a cut line.
The sub-body part
It has a sub-body portion front portion (310), a sub-body portion back surface portion (340), an upper surface portion (350), and a flap (360).
The front part of the sub-body part is continuously provided from the side part on the front side of the upper surface part via a polygonal line.
The flaps are continuously provided from the side portion of the upper surface portion on the side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion via a broken line.
The back surface portion of the sub-body portion is continuously provided from the side portion on the back surface side of the upper surface portion via a broken line, and the back surface portion of the sub-body portion is provided along the outer surface of the back surface portion of the main body portion and is located outside the separation portion. Adhesive to the surface, the front part of the sub-body part is not adhered to the front part of the main body part,
An insertion piece (322) is provided on the front portion of the sub-body portion, and an insertion portion (212) for inserting the insertion piece is provided on the front portion of the main body portion.
In order to close the sub-body part, with the flap bent with respect to the upper surface part, the flap should be inside the first side surface part (20) of the main body part, and the insertion piece should be inserted into the insertion part. By inserting it, the upper surface side of the main body is closed by the upper surface.
A packaging box characterized in that the sub-body portion is removed from the packaging box by pulling out the insertion piece from the insertion portion and breaking the cut line to separate the separation portion from the back portion main body portion.
分離部は、本体部背面部の上辺の一部である上辺部分(240c)と該切目線により囲まれており、
分離部を背面部本体部から分離した際には、本体部背面部には、上方に開口した切欠部が形成されることを特徴とする請求項7に記載の包装箱。
The separation portion is surrounded by the upper side portion (240c), which is a part of the upper side of the back surface portion of the main body portion, and the cut line.
The packaging box according to claim 7, wherein when the separated portion is separated from the back surface portion, a notch portion opened upward is formed on the back surface portion of the main body portion.
上面部の本体部第1側面部側には、突状部(153A、154、156、354、356)が設けられ、フラップは、本体部第1側面部側の辺部における突状部が形成された部分以外の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、
突状部の先端が、左右方向において、本体部第1側面部の内側の面よりも外側に突出するとともに、上面部の本体部第2側面部側の辺部に沿った端部領域(158、358)における本部第2側面部側の先端が、左右方向において、本体部第2側面部の内側の面よりも外側に突出し、
副体部を閉状態にした際には、突状部が、本体部第1側面部の上辺の上側にあり、上面部の本体部第2側面部側の辺部に沿った端部領域が、本体部第2側面部の上辺の上側にあることを特徴とする請求項1又は2又は3又は4又は5又は6又は7又は8に記載の包装箱。
A protruding portion (153A, 154, 156, 354, 356) is provided on the first side surface side of the main body portion of the upper surface portion, and the flap is formed with a protruding portion on the side portion on the first side surface portion side of the main body portion. It is connected from the side other than the part that was made via a polygonal line,
The tip of the protruding portion protrudes outward from the inner surface of the first side surface portion of the main body portion in the left-right direction, and the end region (158) along the side portion of the upper surface portion on the second side surface portion side of the main body portion. The tip of the second side surface portion of the main body in 358) protrudes outward from the inner surface of the second side surface portion of the main body portion in the left-right direction.
When the sub-body portion is closed, the protruding portion is on the upper side of the upper side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion, and the end region along the side portion of the upper surface portion on the second side surface portion of the main body portion is formed. The packaging box according to claim 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 or 6 or 7 or 8, wherein the packaging box is located above the upper side of the second side surface portion of the main body portion.
本体部第2側面部の正面側の辺部から折れ線を介して糊代部(49、249)が連設され、該糊代部が本体部正面部の本体部第2側面部側の端部領域に接着され、本体部正面部と本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部と本体部背面部とにおける互いに隣接する各部は、糊代部を介して連設された本体部正面部と本体部第2側面部を除き、折れ線を介して連設されており、
フラップは、上面部における本体部第1側面部側の辺部のみから折れ線を介して連設さ
れていることを特徴とする請求項1又は2又は3又は4又は5又は6又は7又は8又は9に記載の包装箱。
A glue margin portion (49, 249) is continuously provided from the front side portion of the second side surface portion of the main body portion via a polygonal line, and the glue margin portion is an end portion of the front surface portion of the main body portion on the second side surface portion side of the main body portion. Each part adjacent to each other in the front surface portion of the main body portion, the first side surface portion of the main body portion, the second side surface portion of the main body portion, and the back surface portion of the main body portion, which are adhered to the region, are connected to each other via the glue margin portion. Except for the second side surface of the main body, it is connected continuously via a polygonal line.
Claim 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 or 6 or 7 or 8 or The packaging box according to 9.
上面部の本体部第2側面部側の辺部から折れ線を介して第2フラップ(170、370)が連設され、
副体部を閉状態にするには、第2フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、第2フラップが、本体部第2側面部の内側となるようにすることを特徴とする請求項1又は2又は3又は4又は5又は6又は7又は8に記載の包装箱。
A second flap (170, 370) is continuously provided from the side of the main body of the upper surface on the side of the second side surface via a polygonal line.
The claim is characterized in that, in order to close the sub-body portion, the second flap is bent with respect to the upper surface portion so that the second flap is inside the second side surface portion of the main body portion. The packaging box according to 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 or 6 or 7 or 8.
上面部の本体部第1側面部側には、突状部(153A、154、156、354、356)が設けられ、フラップは、本体部第1側面部側の辺部における突状部が形成された部分以外の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、突状部の先端が、左右方向において、本体部第1側面部の内側の面よりも外側に突出し、
上面部の本体部第2側面部側には、第2突状部(153B、155、157、355、357)が設けられ、第2フラップは、本体部第2側面部側の辺部における第2突状部が形成された部分以外の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、第2突状部の先端が、左右方向において、本体部第2側面部の内側の面よりも外側に突出し、
副体部を閉状態にした際には、突状部が、本体部第1側面部の上辺の上側にあり、第2突状部が、本体部第2側面部の上辺の上側にあることを特徴とする請求項11に記載の包装箱。
A protruding portion (153A, 154, 156, 354, 356) is provided on the first side surface side of the main body portion of the upper surface portion, and the flap is formed with a protruding portion on the side portion on the first side surface portion side of the main body portion. It is continuously provided from the side portion other than the formed portion via a polygonal line, and the tip of the protruding portion protrudes outward from the inner surface of the first side surface portion of the main body portion in the left-right direction.
A second protruding portion (153B, 155, 157, 355, 357) is provided on the second side surface side of the main body portion of the upper surface portion, and the second flap is a second side portion on the second side surface portion side of the main body portion. It is continuously connected from the side portion other than the portion where the two protruding portions are formed via a polygonal line, and the tip of the second protruding portion protrudes outward from the inner surface of the second side surface portion of the main body portion in the left-right direction. ,
When the sub-body portion is closed, the protruding portion is on the upper side of the upper side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion, and the second protruding portion is on the upper side of the upper side of the second side surface portion of the main body portion. The packaging box according to claim 11.
側面部構成部が、本体部正面部、本体部第1側面部、本体部背面部、本体部第2側面部の順に連設され、
底面部が、ワンタッチ底により形成され、本体部正面部の下辺から連設された底面部第1片部(60)と、本体部第1側面部の下辺から連設された底面部第2片部(70)と、本体部第2側面部の下辺から連設された底面部第3片部(80)と、本体部背面部の下辺から連設された底面部第4片部(90)とを有し、
底面部第1片部と底面部第2片部からなる底面部第1片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である第1端部領域(74)が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該第1端部領域が底面部第1片部対における他方に接着され、
底面部第3片部と底面部第4片部からなる底面部第2片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である第2端部領域(84)が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該第2端部領域が底面部第2片部対における他方に接着されていることを特徴とする請求項1又は2又は3又は4又は5又は6又は7又は8又は9又は10又は11又は12に記載の包装箱。
The side surface components are connected in the order of the front surface of the main body, the first side surface of the main body, the back surface of the main body, and the second side surface of the main body.
The bottom surface is formed by a one-touch bottom, and the bottom surface first piece (60) connected from the lower side of the front surface of the main body and the bottom surface second piece connected from the lower side of the first side surface of the main body. A third piece (80) of the bottom surface portion connected from the lower side of the second side surface portion of the main body portion, and a fourth piece portion (90) of the bottom surface portion connected from the lower side of the back surface portion of the main body portion. And have
The first end region (74), which is the other side portion of one of the bottom portion first piece pair consisting of the bottom portion first piece portion and the bottom surface portion second piece portion, can be bent via a bending line. , The first end region is adhered to the other in the bottom surface first piece pair.
The second end region (84), which is the other side portion of one of the bottom portion second piece pair consisting of the bottom portion third piece portion and the bottom surface portion fourth piece portion, can be bent via the bending line. 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 or 5 or 6 or 7 or 8 or 9 or 10 or 11; Or the packaging box according to 12.
包装箱であって、
本体部(3C)と副体部(101C)とを有し、
本体部と副体部が、ともに、シート状のブランクにより形成され、
本体部が、
底面部(50)と、
底面部の各辺から立設する側面構成部で、本体部正面部(10)と、本体部第1側面部(20)と、本体部第2側面部(30)と、本体部背面部(40)と、糊代部(49)とを有し、本体部第2側面部、本体部正面部、本体部第1側面部、本体部背面部、糊代部の順に連設された側面構成部(5)と、を有し、
本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の一方の側が側面構成部の左側面側となり、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の他方の側が側面構成部の右側面側となり、
糊代部が、本体部第2側面部の本体部背面部側の端部領域に接着され、
本体部正面部には、上方に開口した切欠部(K10)が設けられ、
本体部背面部の一部が分離部(44)として本体部背面部における分離部以外の部分である背面本体部(42)と切目線を介して分離可能に形成され、分離部は、本体部背面部
の下辺の一部である下辺部分(44a)と該切目線により囲まれており、
底面部には、該下辺部分における少なくとも一部を辺部とする開口部(93)が形成され、
副体部が、
副体部正面部(110)と、副体部背面部(140)と、上面部(150)と、フラップ(170)とを有し、
副体部正面部は、上面部の正面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、
フラップは、上面部の本体部第2側面部側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、
副体部背面部は、上面部の背面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、本体部背面部の外側の面に沿って設けられ、分離部の外側の面に接着され、
上面部の本体部第2側面部側には、突状部(153B、155、157)が設けられ、フラップは、上面部の本体部第2側面部側の辺部における突状部が形成された部分以外の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、突状部の先端が、左右方向において、本体部第2側面部の内側の面よりも外側に突出し、
副体部正面部は、本体部正面部と非接着であり、
副体部を閉状態とするには、フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、フラップが本体部第2側面部(30)の内側となるようにするとともに、副体部正面部が上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、副体部正面部が本体部正面部の内側となるようにして、本体部の上面側を上面部により閉じた状態とし、
副体部を閉状態にした際には、副体部正面部の少なくとも先端側の辺部(110c)は、本体部正面部の背面側に位置し、突状部が、本体部第2側面部の上辺の上側にあり、
分離部の下端に指を係止した状態で、分離部の下端を外側にひっぱり切目線を破断して分離部を背面部本体部から分離することにより、副体部が包装箱から取り除かれることを特徴とする包装箱。
It ’s a packaging box,
It has a main body part (3C) and a sub body part (101C).
Both the main body and the sub-body are formed by a sheet-shaped blank.
The main body is
Bottom part (50) and
A side component that stands up from each side of the bottom surface, including the front surface of the main body (10), the first side surface of the main body (20), the second side surface of the main body (30), and the back surface of the main body (30). 40) and a glue margin portion (49), and a side surface configuration in which the second side surface portion of the main body portion, the front surface portion of the main body portion, the first side surface portion of the main body portion, the back surface portion of the main body portion , and the glue margin portion are continuously provided in this order. It has a part (5) and
One side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the left side surface side of the side component portion, and the other side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion and the second side surface portion of the main body portion is the right side surface side of the side surface component portion. Next,
The glue margin portion is adhered to the end region on the back surface side of the main body portion of the second side surface portion of the main body portion.
A notch (K10) opened upward is provided on the front surface of the main body.
A part of the back surface portion of the main body portion is formed as a separation portion (44) so as to be separable from the back surface main body portion (42) which is a portion other than the separation portion on the back surface portion of the main body portion via a cut line, and the separation portion is formed as a main body portion. It is surrounded by the lower side portion (44a), which is a part of the lower side of the back surface portion, and the cut line.
An opening (93) having at least a part of the lower side portion as a side portion is formed on the bottom surface portion.
The sub-body part
It has a sub-body portion front portion (110), a sub-body portion back surface portion (140), an upper surface portion (150), and a flap (170).
The front part of the sub-body part is continuously provided from the side part on the front side of the upper surface part via a polygonal line.
The flaps are continuously provided from the side portion of the upper surface portion on the second side surface portion side of the main body portion via a broken line.
The back surface portion of the sub-body portion is continuously provided from the side portion on the back surface side of the upper surface portion via a polygonal line, and the back surface portion of the sub-body portion is provided along the outer surface of the back surface portion of the main body portion and is located outside the separation portion. Adhered to the surface,
A protruding portion (153B, 155, 157) is provided on the second side surface side of the main body portion of the upper surface portion, and the flap is formed with a protruding portion on the side portion of the upper surface portion on the second side surface portion side of the main body portion. It is connected continuously from the side part other than the vertical part via the polygonal line, and the tip of the protruding part protrudes outward from the inner surface of the second side surface part of the main body part in the left-right direction.
The front part of the sub-body part is not adhered to the front part of the main body part,
In order to close the sub-body part, the flap is bent with respect to the upper surface portion so that the flap is inside the second side surface portion (30) of the main body portion, and the front portion of the sub-body portion is the upper surface portion. In a state of being bent with respect to the portion, the front portion of the sub-body portion is inside the front portion of the main body portion, and the upper surface side of the main body portion is closed by the upper surface portion.
When the sub-body portion is closed, at least the tip side side portion (110c) of the sub-body portion front portion is located on the back side of the main body portion front portion, and the protruding portion is the second side surface of the main body portion. It is on the upper side of the upper side of the part,
With the finger locked to the lower end of the separation part, the lower end of the separation part is pulled outward to break the cut line and separate the separation part from the main body part of the back part, so that the sub-body part is removed from the packaging box. A packaging box featuring.
上面部の本体部第1側面部側の辺部から折れ線を介して第2フラップ(160)が連設され、
上面部の本体部第1側面部側には、第2突状部(153A、154、156)が設けられ、第2フラップは、本体部第1側面部側の辺部における第2突状部が形成された部分以外の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、第2突状部の先端が、左右方向において、本体部第1側面部の内側の面よりも外側に突出し、
副体部を閉状態にするには、第2フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、第2フラップが、本体部第1側面部の内側となるようにし、
副体部を閉状態にした際には、第2突状部が、本体部第1側面部の上辺の上側にあることを特徴とする請求項14に記載の包装箱。
A second flap (160) is continuously provided from the side of the main body of the upper surface on the side of the first side surface via a polygonal line.
A second protruding portion (153A, 154, 156) is provided on the first side surface side of the main body portion of the upper surface portion, and the second flap is a second protruding portion on the side portion on the first side surface portion side of the main body portion. The tip of the second protruding portion protrudes outward from the inner surface of the first side surface portion of the main body portion in the left-right direction.
In order to close the sub-body portion, the second flap is bent with respect to the upper surface portion, and the second flap is placed inside the first side surface portion of the main body portion.
The packaging box according to claim 14, wherein the second protruding portion is located on the upper side of the upper side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion when the sub-body portion is closed.
面部が、ワンタッチ底により形成され、本体部第2側面部の下辺から連設された底面部第1片部(60)と、本体部正面部の下辺から連設された底面部第2片部(70)と、本体部背面部の下辺から連設された底面部第3片部(80)と、本体部第1側面部の下辺から連設された底面部第4片部(90)とを有し、
底面部第1片部と底面部第2片部からなる底面部第1片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である第1端部領域(74)が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該第1端部領域が底面部第1片部対における他方に接着され、
底面部第3片部と底面部第4片部からなる底面部第2片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である第2端部領域(84)が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該第2端部領域が底面部第2片部対における他方に接着されていることを特徴とする請求項14又は15に記載の包装箱。
Bottom surface portion, is formed by one-touch bottom, the first arm portion bottom portion which is continuously provided from the lower side of the second side body portion (60), the second piece bottom portion that is continuously provided from the lower side of the body portion front portion A third piece (80) of the bottom surface portion connected from the lower side of the back surface portion of the main body portion (70), and a fourth piece portion (90) of the bottom surface portion connected from the lower side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion. And have
The first end region (74), which is the other side portion of one of the bottom portion first piece pair consisting of the bottom portion first piece portion and the bottom surface portion second piece portion, can be bent via a bending line. , The first end region is adhered to the other in the bottom surface first piece pair.
The second end region (84), which is the other side portion of one of the bottom portion second piece pair consisting of the bottom portion third piece portion and the bottom surface portion fourth piece portion, can be bent via the bending line. The packaging box according to claim 14 or 15, wherein the second end region is adhered to the other side of the bottom surface portion second piece pair.
包装箱であって、本体部(3C)と副体部(101C)とを有し、本体部と副体部が、と
もに、シート状のブランクにより形成され、本体部が、底面部(50)と、底面部の各辺から立設する側面構成部で、本体部正面部(10)と、本体部第1側面部(20)と、本体部第2側面部(30)と、本体部背面部(40)と、糊代部(49)とを有し、本体部第2側面部、本体部正面部、本体部第1側面部、本体部背面部、糊代部の順に連設された側面構成部(5)と、を有し、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の一方の側が側面構成部の左側面側となり、本体部第1側面部と本体部第2側面部の他方の側が側面構成部の右側面側となり、糊代部が、本体部第2側面部の背面側の端部領域に接着され、本体部正面部には、上方に開口した切欠部(K10)が設けられ、本体部背面部の一部が分離部(44)として本体部背面部における分離部以外の部分である背面本体部(42)と切目線を介して分離可能に形成され、底面部が、ワンタッチ底により形成され、本体部第2側面部の下辺から連設された底面部第1片部(60)と、本体部正面部の下辺から連設された底面部第2片部(70)と、本体部背面部の下辺から連設された底面部第3片部(80)と、本体部第1側面部の下辺から連設された底面部第4片部(90)とを有し、底面部第1片部と底面部第2片部からなる底面部第1片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である第1端部領域(74)が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該第1端部領域が底面部第1片部対における他方に接着され、底面部第3片部と底面部第4片部からなる底面部第2片部対の一方における他方の側の部分である第2端部領域(84)が折れ線を介して折曲げ可能であり、該第2端部領域が底面部第2片部対における他方に接着され、副体部が、副体部正面部(110)と、副体部背面部(140)と、上面部(150)と、フラップ(170)とを有し、副体部正面部は、上面部の正面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、フラップは、上面部の本体部第2側面部側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、上面部の背面側の辺部から折れ線を介して連設され、副体部背面部は、本体部背面部の外側の面に沿って設けられ、分離部の外側の面に接着され、副体部を閉状態とするには、フラップを上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、フラップが本体部第2側面部(30)の内側となるようにするとともに、副体部正面部が上面部に対して折り曲げた状態で、副体部正面部が本体部正面部の内側となるようにして、本体部の上面側を上面部により閉じた状態とし、切目線を破断して分離部を背面部本体部から分離することにより、副体部が包装箱から取り除かれる包装箱の製造方法であって、
展開状態の副体部に展開状態の本体部を接着する第1接着工程であって、副体部背面部と本体部背面部を重ねた状態で、分離部と副体部背面部を接着させるとともに、本体部正面部と副体部正面部を非接着とする第1接着工程と、
底面部第1片部と底面部第2片部を側面構成部に対して折り返し第1端部領域を外側に折り返すとともに、第1端部領域と、底面部第1片部と底面部第2片部の他方における第1端部領域が接着する領域のいずれかに接着剤を塗布した状態で、本体部第2側面部を本体部正面部に対して折り返すことにより、第1端部領域と、底面部第1片部と底面部第2片部の他方とを接着する第2接着工程と、
底面部第3片部と底面部第4片部を側面構成部に対して折り返し第2端部領域を外側に折り返すとともに、第2端部領域と、底面部第3片部と底面部第4片部の他方における第2端部領域が接着する領域のいずれかと、糊代部と本体部第2側面部における糊代部が接着する領域のいずれとに接着剤を塗布した状態で、本体部背面部を本体部第1側面部に対して折り返すことにより、第2端部領域と、底面部第3片部と底面部第4片部の他方とを接着するとともに、糊代部と本体部第2側面部を接着する第3接着工程と、
を有することを特徴とする包装箱の製造方法。
It is a packaging box and has a main body portion (3C) and a sub-body portion (101C). Both the main body portion and the sub-body portion are formed of a sheet-shaped blank, and the main body portion is a bottom portion (50). And, in the side component portion that stands up from each side of the bottom surface portion, the front surface portion (10) of the main body portion, the first side surface portion (20) of the main body portion, the second side surface portion (30) of the main body portion, and the back surface of the main body portion. It has a portion (40) and a glue margin portion (49), and is connected in this order in the order of the second side surface portion of the main body portion, the front surface portion of the main body portion, the first side surface portion of the main body portion, the back surface portion of the main body portion, and the glue margin portion. It has a side component (5), and one side of the first side surface of the main body and the second side surface of the main body is the left side of the side component, and the first side surface of the main body and the second side surface of the main body are provided. The other side of the portion is the right side of the side surface component portion, the glue margin portion is adhered to the end region on the back surface side of the second side surface portion of the main body portion, and the front portion of the main body portion has a notch portion opened upward (a notch portion). K10) is provided, and a part of the back surface portion of the main body portion is formed as a separation portion (44) so as to be separable from the back surface main body portion (42) which is a portion other than the separation portion in the back surface portion of the main body portion via a cut line. The bottom surface portion is formed by a one-touch bottom, and the bottom surface portion first piece (60) connected from the lower side of the second side surface portion of the main body portion and the bottom surface portion second piece connected from the lower side of the front surface portion of the main body portion. A third piece (80) of the bottom surface portion connected from the lower side of the back surface portion of the main body portion (70), and a fourth piece portion (90) of the bottom surface portion connected from the lower side of the first side surface portion of the main body portion. The first end region (74), which is the other side portion of one of the bottom portion first piece pair consisting of the bottom portion first piece portion and the bottom surface portion second piece portion, passes through a broken line. It is bendable, and the first end region is adhered to the other side of the first piece pair of the bottom surface portion, and one of the second piece portion pair of the bottom surface portion consisting of the third piece portion of the bottom surface portion and the fourth piece portion of the bottom surface portion. The second end region (84), which is the other side portion in the However, it has a sub-body portion front portion (110), a sub-body portion back surface portion (140), an upper surface portion (150), and a flap (170), and the sub-body portion front portion is on the front side of the upper surface portion. The flaps are continuously connected from the side of the upper surface via the folding line, the flaps are continuously connected from the side of the upper surface on the second side surface side of the main body via the folding line, and the back surface of the subbody is on the back side of the upper surface. It is continuously connected from the side portion via a broken line, and the back surface portion of the sub-body portion is provided along the outer surface of the back surface portion of the main body portion and is adhered to the outer surface of the separation portion to close the sub-body portion. In the state where the flap is bent with respect to the upper surface portion, the flap is attached to the second side surface portion (3) of the main body portion. 0) The upper surface side of the main body is set so that the front surface of the sub body is bent with respect to the upper surface and the front surface of the sub body is inside the front surface of the main body. Is a method for manufacturing a packaging box in which the sub-body portion is removed from the packaging box by breaking the cut line and separating the separation portion from the back portion main body portion.
In the first bonding step of adhering the unfolded main body to the unfolded sub-body, the separated portion and the back of the sub-body are adhered in a state where the back of the sub-body and the back of the main body are overlapped. At the same time, the first bonding step of non-adhesion between the front part of the main body and the front part of the sub-body,
The first piece of the bottom surface portion and the second piece of the bottom surface portion are folded back with respect to the side surface constituent portion, and the first end portion region is folded outward, and the first end portion region, the first piece portion of the bottom surface portion, and the second bottom portion are folded back. With the adhesive applied to any of the areas where the first end area on the other side of one part adheres, the second side surface portion of the main body portion is folded back with respect to the front portion of the main body portion to form the first end portion region. , A second bonding step of bonding the first piece of the bottom surface and the other of the second piece of the bottom surface,
The third piece of the bottom surface and the fourth piece of the bottom surface are folded back with respect to the side surface components, and the second end area is folded outward, and the second end area, the third piece of the bottom surface, and the fourth bottom surface are folded back. The main body is in a state where the adhesive is applied to either the region where the second end region of one part adheres or the region where the glue margin portion and the glue margin portion of the second side surface portion of the main body adhere. By folding back the back surface portion with respect to the first side surface portion of the main body portion, the second end portion region and the other of the third piece portion of the bottom surface portion and the fourth piece portion of the bottom surface portion are adhered to each other, and the glue margin portion and the main body portion are adhered to each other. The third bonding step of bonding the second side surface and
A method of manufacturing a packaging box, characterized in that it has.
JP2017138637A 2017-07-14 2017-07-14 Packaging box and manufacturing method of packaging box Active JP6974972B2 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017138637A JP6974972B2 (en) 2017-07-14 2017-07-14 Packaging box and manufacturing method of packaging box

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2017138637A JP6974972B2 (en) 2017-07-14 2017-07-14 Packaging box and manufacturing method of packaging box

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
JP2019018884A JP2019018884A (en) 2019-02-07
JP6974972B2 true JP6974972B2 (en) 2021-12-01

Family

ID=65354064

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
JP2017138637A Active JP6974972B2 (en) 2017-07-14 2017-07-14 Packaging box and manufacturing method of packaging box

Country Status (1)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6974972B2 (en)

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3139948U (en) * 2007-12-26 2008-03-06 株式会社クラウン・パッケージ Packaging box
JP3147173U (en) * 2008-10-06 2008-12-18 株式会社クラウン・パッケージ Packaging box
JP2017019547A (en) * 2015-07-14 2017-01-26 レンゴー株式会社 Two-piece packing box

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2019018884A (en) 2019-02-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP3185841U (en) Packaging box
JP6974972B2 (en) Packaging box and manufacturing method of packaging box
JP6585516B2 (en) Packaging box
JP5917224B2 (en) Packaging box
JP2018193114A (en) Packing box
JP2018184178A (en) Packing box and its manufacturing method
JP2017047967A (en) Packing box
JP3174806U (en) Packaging box
JP5380730B2 (en) Packaging case, cleaning tool package, and cleaning tool product
JP3231492U (en) Packaging box
JP3214314U (en) Cardboard box
JP6902874B2 (en) Packaging box manufacturing method and packaging box
JP3235368U (en) Packaging box
JP5956281B2 (en) Pop card holder deployment and pop card holder
JP3199762U (en) Packaging box
JP5155014B2 (en) Packaging box with hanging piece
JP5362387B2 (en) Packaging box with hanging function
JP5633956B2 (en) Writing instrument storage case
JP7152305B2 (en) furniture
JP6890483B2 (en) Packaging box
JP2007069929A (en) Packaging box made of corrugated board
JP6951880B2 (en) Containment box
JP6806484B2 (en) Box body, packaging box and manufacturing method of packaging box
JP3200949U (en) Light guide plate frame and sheet body
JP6755765B2 (en) Box body and packaging box

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
A621 Written request for application examination

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A621

Effective date: 20200629

A977 Report on retrieval

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A971007

Effective date: 20210511

A131 Notification of reasons for refusal

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A131

Effective date: 20210517

A601 Written request for extension of time

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A601

Effective date: 20210705

A521 Written amendment

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A523

Effective date: 20210827

TRDD Decision of grant or rejection written
A01 Written decision to grant a patent or to grant a registration (utility model)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A01

Effective date: 20211101

A61 First payment of annual fees (during grant procedure)

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: A61

Effective date: 20211105

R150 Certificate of patent or registration of utility model

Ref document number: 6974972

Country of ref document: JP

Free format text: JAPANESE INTERMEDIATE CODE: R150